韦兰若篇解释显示巴利原文
Verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
“Seyyathidaṃ”的意思是:那个是什么,或那个是如何。所谓“非限定指示语”,是指并非依自身形相限定而指示的词语;而“限定指示”则是依自身形相限定而指示,“非限定指示”即不是限定指示。而通过此(语词)所说出的,便称为“语词”,因此说“非限定指示语”。所谓“它的”(tassā),即“因此”(tena)一词。所谓“思虑”(parivitakko),是指“哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行不久住呢?”等(《波罗夷》第18页)中所起的思虑。所谓“在前或在后”,意思是:在“因此”一词之前已说的文句中,或在之后将说的文句中。所谓“以义理成就”,即依其能力而成就。所谓“此中,此仅为入门之例示”,意思是:为阐明如前所述的理趣,这仅是方法之例示。因为“面”(mukhaṃ)、“门”(dvāraṃ)、“方便”(upāyo),于义理上实为同一。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho. Aniyamaniddesavacananti attano atthaṃ sarūpena niyametvā niddisatīti niyamaniddeso, na niyamaniddeso aniyamaniddeso. Sova vuccate anenāti vacananti aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ. Tassāti tenātipadassa. Parivitakkoti ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosī’’tiādinā (pārā. 18) pavatto. Pubbe vā pacchā vāti tenātipadato heṭṭhā vuttapāṭhe vā upari vakkhamānapāṭhe vāti attho. Atthato siddhenāti sāmatthiyato siddhena. Tatridaṃ mukhamattanidassananti tassā yathāvuttayuttiyā paridīpane idaṃ upāyamattanidassanaṃ. Mukhaṃ dvāraṃ upāyoti hi atthato ekaṃ.
“出现‘samaya’一词”是连接关系。“它的”意思是:samaya一词有“会合”之义,这是连接关系。“缘于时间和时机”:这里,时间是指适合前往的适当时间,时机是指体力等诸因缘之和合,缘于、依于这些(时间和时机),是这个意思。“刹那”是指机会。因为佛出世等,正是道与梵行的机会。那机会本身就是“时机”。因此说“唯一”。“大集会”即大聚集。“在林中”即在树林中。“跋陀利,那时机也确实……”:此处,“时机”指违犯学处之因由。那是什么?即世尊知道自己的违犯行为,那个称为“时机”的因由未被通达,是这个意思。“世尊”等,是显示其通达之方式。“Uggahamāno”:因能学取某些东西而称为“Uggahamāno”,这是善漫遍行者的名字。“在此宣说时机、见解之处”即“宣说时机者”,是末利迦园。那个园子,因被名为tindukācīra的timbara树列所围绕,故称为“Tindukācīra”;又因只有一座住处殿堂,故称为“Ekasālaka”。“义现观”:因获得如前所述的现世与来世之义利、利益。显示巴利原文
Samayasaddo dissatīti sambandho. Assāti samayasaddassa samavāyo atthoti sambandho. Kālañca samayañca upādāyāti ettha kālo nāma upasaṅkamanassa yuttakālo, samayo nāma sarīrabalādikāraṇasamavāyo, te upādāya paṭiccāti attho. Khaṇoti okāso. Buddhuppādādayo hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso. So eva samayo. Teneva ‘‘ekovā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Pavanasminti vanasaṇḍe. Samayopi kho te bhaddālīti ettha samayoti sikkhāpadāvilaṅghanassa hetu, ko so? Attano vippaṭipattiyā bhagavato jānanaṃ, so samayasaṅkhāto hetu tassā appaṭividdhoti attho. Bhagavātiādi tassa paṭivijjhanākāradassanaṃ. Uggahamānoti kiñci kiñci uggahetuṃ samatthatāya uggahamāno, sumanaparibbājakassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavadanti etthāti samayappavādako, mallikāya ārāmo. Sveva tindukācīrasaṅkhātāya timbarurukkhapantiyā parikkhittattā ‘‘tindukācīra’’nti ca, ekāva nivāsā sālā etthāti ‘‘ekasālako’’ti ca vuccati. Atthābhisamayāti yathāvuttassa diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikassa atthassa hitassa paṭilābhato. Mānābhisamayāti mānappahānā. Pīḷanaṭṭhoti pīḷanaṃ taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ, avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ, pīḷanameva attho pīḷanaṭṭho . Santāpoti dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ. Vipariṇāmoti jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā abhisametabbo paṭivijjhitabboti abhisamayo, sova abhisamayaṭṭho, pīḷanādīni.
此处,由于前缀仅有显明作用,因此在提取 samaya 一词的含义时,也包含了带前缀的 abhisamaya 一词。其中,以“会合”为义:诸缘产生果报、共同转起,于此意义上称为 samaya,即“会合”。当有作为还灭亲依止的会合时,众生于此转起,故称为 samaya,即“刹那”。有为法于此会合,或它自身来去,故称为 samaya,即“时间”。组成部分于此和合,或它自身与它们和合,故称为 samaya,即“聚集”。有其他缘的会合时,果从此而来,故称为 samaya,即“因”。以想颠倒而执取诸法,故称为 samaya,即“邪见”。接近而行、靠近,称为 samaya,即“获得”。正确和合之语的离去,称为 samaya,即“断除”。正确和合之真实的行与了知,称为 samaya,即“通达”。应如此了知 samaya 一词在各种意义中的用法。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca upasaggānaṃ jotakamattattā samayasaddassa atthuddhārepi saupasaggo abhisamayasaddo uddhaṭo. Tattha saṅgamavasena paccayānaṃ phaluppādanaṃ paṭi ayanaṃ ekato pavatti etthāti samayo, samavāyo. Vivaṭṭūpanissayasaṅgame sati enti ettha sattā pavattantīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha saṅkhatadhammo, sayaṃ vā eti āgacchati vigacchati cāti samayo, kālo. Samenti avayavā etasmiṃ, sayaṃ vā tesūti samayo, samūho. Paccayantarasaṅgame eti āgacchati etasmā phalanti samayo, hetu. Saññāvasena vipallāsato dhammesu eti abhinivisatīti samayo, diṭṭhi. Samīpaṃ ayanaṃ upagamanaṃ samayo, paṭilābho. Sammadeva sahitānaṃ vācānaṃ ayanaṃ vigamoti samayo, pahānaṃ. Sammadeva, sahitānaṃ vā saccānaṃ ayanaṃ jānananti samayo, paṭivedho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddassa pavatti veditabbā.
此处,samaya 一词从总说而言具有多义性。因为一个在特定意义上使用的词,并不也在其他意义上使用。因此,正如意义有别,表达这些意义的 samaya 一词也各自不同,应如此把握。于一切处提取含义时,皆当如此。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca samayasaddassa sāmaññena anekatthatā vuttā. Na hi ekasmiṃ atthavisese vattamāno saddo tadaññepi vattati. Tasmā atthā viya taṃtaṃvācakā samayasaddāpi bhinnā evāti gahetabbā. Evaṃ sabbattha atthuddhāresu.
其中,“如此”(tathā)是以依格和业格来指那些经与阿毗达摩中的内容。“在此”(idha)指在律藏中,“否则”(aññathā)是以作格来说。“绝对地”(accantameva)即无有间断。所谓“性”(bhāvo),即是作用;以作用来表征另一作用,即“以性表征性”,例如当月出时,说“王子诞生了”。所谓“因为所依……”等:在阿毗达摩中,samaya 一词用于时间、聚集、刹那、会合、因这五种意义,不像在律藏中仅用于时间。其中,时间与聚集二义,适合以所依的方式来说明那里所说的触等诸法。而刹那、会合、因三义,则适合以自身之性来表征触等诸法之性的方式来说明。这是通过阐明的方式,来成立前面所述的意义。其中,当某一时间,或某一法聚作为所依时,善生起;就在同一时间,或同一法聚中,触等存在。这是所依义的解释。而当某一刹那,或会合,或因作为“性”而存在时,善生起;就在那同一刹那等作为“性”而存在时,触等存在。这是“以性表征性”义的解释。应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Tattha tathāti tesu suttābhidhammesu upayogabhummavacanehi. Idhāti vinaye, aññathāti karaṇavacanena. Accantamevāti nirantarameva. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantarūpalakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, yathā udaye sati cande jāto rājaputtoti. Adhikaraṇañhītiādi abhidhamme samayasaddo kālasamūhakhaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātesu pañcasu atthesu vattati, na vinaye viya kāle eva, tesu ca kālasamūhatthā dve tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ adhikaraṇabhāvena niddisituṃ yuttā. Khaṇasamavāyahetuatthā pana tayopi attano bhāvena phassādīnaṃ bhāvassa upalakkhaṇabhāvena niddisituṃ yuttāti vibhāvanamukhena yathāvuttamatthaṃ samatthetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmiñhi kāle, dhammasamūhe vā samaye adhikaraṇabhūte kusalaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmiññeva kāle, dhammasamūhe vā samaye phassādayo hontīti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthayojanā, yasmiṃ pana khaṇe, samavāye hetumhi vā samaye sati vijjamāne kusalaṃ uppannaṃ, tasmiññeva khaṇādimhi samayepi vijjamāne phassādayo hontīti bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthayojanā ca veditabbā.
“在此有”(hoti cettha):指一首摄颂,含摄了前述的意义范围。“除了”(aññatra):指在经与阿毗达摩中。“仅是言说上的差别”:仅是依说法方式而有的言辞差别,并非意义上的差别。显示巴利原文
Hoticetthāti ettha yathāvuttaatthavisaye saṅgahagāthā hoti. Aññatrāti suttābhidhammesu. Abhilāpamattabhedoti desanāvilāsato saddamatteneva bhedo, na atthato.
“无差别”:指以共通性而言。对于“威仪路”等词,“路”是指通过一切根门而起活动的转起处,由于没有据此而安立的业,所以站立等即是威仪路,也就是住处。成为梵天者即成为最胜者,由于是以利他之心等而转起,因此慈等称为“梵住”。然而,其余的大功德住,由于以去除一切盖障等所成就的光明等义,称为“天住”。因为已经以梵住之性单独摄取了慈等,所以此处未将其包含在内。唯有圣者所住,故果等至称为“圣住”。显示巴利原文
Avisesenāti sāmaññena. Iriyāpathotiādīsu iriyāya sabbadvārikakiriyāya patho pavattanaṭṭhānaṃ tabbinimuttakammassa abhāvāti ṭhānādayo iriyāpatho, sova vihāro. Brahmabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā parahitacittādivasappavattito mettādayo brahmavihāro nāma. Tadavasesā pana mahaggatā sabbanīvaraṇavigamanādisiddhena jotanādiatthena dibbavihāro nāma. Brahmavihārabhāvena visuṃ gahitattā mettādayo idha asaṅgahitā. Ariyānameva vihāroti phalasamāpattiyo ariyavihāro nāma.
为了显示“根”一词在“树下等”中的惯用义,又用另一个“根”字作简别,而说“根根”,如同“苦苦”一样(参见《分别论注》190)。由于贪等是与瞋根等心共通的,故说“于不共因中”。显示巴利原文
Rukkhādimūleyeva mūlasaddassa niruḷhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ aparena mūlasaddena visesetvā ‘‘mūlamūle’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā dukkhadukkhanti (vibha. aṭṭha. 190). Lobhādīnaṃ dosamūlādicittāsādhāraṇattā ‘‘asādhāraṇahetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ.
其中,“可能有”意指,在“韦朗加人”等段落中,或许会有某人的诘问。然而,以两种方式叙述因缘,有何作用?答:为了显示行境村落等。其中,“他的”指世尊的。显示巴利原文
Tattha siyāti tattha verañjāyantiādīsu padesu kassaci codanā siyāti attho. Ubhayathā nidānakittanassa pana kiṃ payojananti? Āha gocaragāmanidassanatthantiādi. Tattha assāti bhagavato.
“疲劳”即是疲倦;对自身身体的疲倦是“自我疲倦”,对它一再地投入、反复转起,便是“自我疲倦的投入”。由于与所依的欲乐对象之乐相结合而沉溺、投入,这是欲贪;它随逐于那些欲乐,或沉溺于对象之乐而转起,故称“沉溺欲乐之贪”;对它的一再投入,即是“沉溺欲乐的投入”——在世间随物欲增长的状态。当它生起时,确实只是为了利益大众等目的而生起,这便是其中的连结。显示巴利原文
Kilamova kilamatho, attano attabhāvassa kilamatho attakilamatho, tassa anu anu yogo punappunaṃ pavattanaṃ attakilamathānuyogo. Vatthukāmārammaṇe sukhe sampayogavasena līnā yuttā, kāmataṇhā , taṃsahacarite kāme sukhe vā ārammaṇabhūte allīnā pavattatīti kāmasukhallikā taṇhā, tassā kāmasukhallikāya anu anu yogo kāmasukhallikānuyogo. Loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvanti āmisopabhogena saṃvaḍḍhitabhāvaṃ. Uppajjamāno bahujanahitādiatthāyeva uppajjatīti yojanā.
为了阐明“以见与戒的共通性而和合,故为僧团”之义,而说“见”等。此处,“见”即经中所说:“凡此见是圣的、能出离的,能令其作者正确地尽除诸苦,以如是之见而住于见共通性中”;“戒”则是:“凡那些戒无缺……乃至……能引生定,于如是戒中住于戒共通性中”。以称为共通性的和合、集合而成的沙门团体,这便是其义。或者,此处也可读作“以见戒共通性的集合、和合”,其义为:由见戒共通性所成的和合而集合的沙门团体。因为如此读法,于字面上更为合理。“他的”指大比丘僧团的。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha diṭṭhītiādi. Ettha ca ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni…pe… samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānañca sīlānaṃ sāmaññasaṅkhātena saṅghāto saṅghaṭito samaṇagaṇo, tenāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅghātenā’’ti vā pāṭhenettha bhavitabbaṃ, tassa diṭṭhisīlasāmaññabhūtena saṃhananena saṅghāto samaṇagaṇo, tenāti attho. Evañhi pāṭhe saddato attho yuttataro hoti. Assāti mahato bhikkhusaṅghassa.
在“梵行”一词中,此处以“梵”字指称吠陀,吠陀依密咒梵行、仪轨梵行等分为三类。其中,梨俱吠陀等三吠陀是密咒,为根本,其余诸吠陀则为附属,故此处唯取根本。所谓“诵习咒语”,即诵习梨俱吠陀等密咒论典之义。梨俱吠陀等因应被秘密诵持,故称“咒语”。为以两句例证阐明如前所说的两种义理——“已除诸恶故为婆罗门”“已息诸恶故为沙门”,乃说“因为……”等语。即取其“因为已息诸恶故,称为沙门”一句,而说“以已息诸恶故,称为沙门”;“已除诸恶”则是另一偈颂中所说。“如实通达功德”,指如实通达的功德;“有所执著”,指有过失。显示巴利原文
Brahmaṃ aṇatīti ettha brahma-saddena vedo vuccati, so mantabrahmakappavasena tividho. Tattha iruvedādayo tayo vedā mantā, te ca padhānā, itare pana sannissitā, tena padhānasseva gahaṇaṃ. Mante sajjhāyatīti iruvedādike mantasatthe sajjhāyatīti attho. Iruvedādayo hi guttabhāsitabbatāya ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo, samitapāpattā samaṇo’’ti yathāvuttamatthadvayaṃ udāharaṇadvayena vibhāvetuṃ vuttañhetantiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Samitattā hi pāpānaṃ ‘samaṇo’ti pavuccatī’’ti hi idaṃ vacanaṃ gahetvā ‘‘samitapāpattā ‘samaṇo’ti vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ, bāhitapāpoti idaṃ pana aññasmiṃ gāthābandhe vuttavacanaṃ. Yathābhuccaguṇādhigatanti yathābhūtaguṇādhigataṃ. Sakiñcanoti sadoso.
“以族姓故”者:此中,“守护之”故名为族姓——“牛”字于此亦表名称与智慧之义。“以某种衰损”者:即因亲族衰损等某种衰损,义为衰退。“从彼以后”者:即“韦朗加人”等语。“于表示如是情状之义中用业格”者:“如是”即“此种样态”,“成就”即“达到”,故“如是情状者”指达到此种样态之人;对其陈说,名为“如是情状之陈述”,即“如是情状陈述义”。或者,已成为、已生为如此这般之状态——如此说明之义,即是“如是情状陈述义”,于此义中作业格,此乃其义。此中,“高起”的“abhi”前缀,因彰示“凌越而上之样态”,故为表“如是情状陈述义”之词。由此,“彼尊乔达摩”此一业格语,虽与属格义同,然因欲表“如是情状陈述”,而说“于如是情状陈述义中”;正因如此,遂云:“义为彼尊乔达摩者”。显示巴利原文
Gottavasenāti ettha gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ, go-saddena cettha abhidhānaṃ buddhi ca vuccati. Kenaci pārijuññenāti ñātipārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena , parihāniyāti attho. Tato paranti verañjāyantiādivacanaṃ. Itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacananti itthaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto āpannoti itthambhūto, tassa ākhyānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānaṃ, soyevattho itthambhūtākhyānattho. Atha vā ‘‘itthaṃ evaṃpakāro bhūto jāto’’ti evaṃ kathanattho itthambhūtākhyānattho, tasmiṃ upayogavacananti attho. Ettha ca abbhuggatoti ettha abhi-saddo itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārassa dīpanato, tena yogato taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamanti idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthepi samāne itthambhūtākhyānadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ, tenevāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho’’ti.
所说之义如下:譬如“善哉,提婆达多孝于母亲”一句,因连用“abhi”前缀,故于如是情状陈述中作业格;同样,此处“彼尊乔达摩如是美好之称誉声高起”,亦因连用“abhi”前缀,于如是情状陈述中作业格。在“善哉,提婆达多孝于母亲”中,本有“提婆达多于母亲领域中为善,或与母亲相属”之义,即当用处格或属格,然因连用彰示“如是情状陈述”义的“abhi”前缀,遂改为业格。正如彼句中,可了知“提婆达多于母亲领域中、与母亲相属,达到所述之样态”;同理,此处亦可了知“属于尊乔达摩之称誉声,凌越而高起,达到上升之样态”。彼句取“提婆达多”,如同此处取“称誉声”;彼句之“母亲”,如同此处之“彼尊乔达摩”;彼句取“善哉”,如同此处取“高起”——应如此知。“称誉声”者,即“成为称誉之声”;为简别“非仅如此”,故说“唯称誉也”。从彼称誉而来者,即赞叹;宣扬彼之声,名“称誉声”,为显此义,故说“或赞叹之声也”。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā sādhu devadatto mātaramabhīti ettha abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ abhi evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo uggatoti abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacananti. Sādhu devadatto mātaramabhīti ettha hi ‘‘devadatto mātaramabhi mātari visaye mātuyā vā sādhū’’ti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthe vā sāmiatthe vā bhummavacanassa sāmivacanassa vā pasaṅge itthambhūtākhyānatthajotakena abhisaddena yoge upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, yathā cettha devadatto mātuvisaye mātusambandhī vā so vuttappakārappattoti ayamattho viññāyati, evamidhāpi bhoto gotamassa sambandhī kittisaddo abbhuggato abhibhavitvā uggamanapakārappattoti ayamattho viññāyati. Tattha hi devadattaggahaṇaṃ viya idha kittisaddaggahaṇaṃ, tattha mātaranti vacanaṃ viya idha taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamanti vacanaṃ, tattha sādhusaddaggahaṇaṃ viya idha uggatasaddaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kittisaddoti kittibhūto saddo, na kevaloti dassanatthaṃ visesitanti āha ‘‘kitti evā’’ti. Tato kittīti thuti, tassā pakāsako saddo kittisaddoti dassetuṃ ‘‘thutighoso vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“彼世尊”——此处“彼”字为明确所指,即:那位圆满了三十波罗蜜、摧破一切烦恼、震动十千世界、证得无上正自觉的圣者,于世间极负盛名,故而称为“彼世尊”。至于“世尊”一词,此处在称述导师之名号,而非阐述其功德。然而在其他场合,“世尊”则用作功德的称述。“由这些缘由”——以此显示依于阿拉汉等各别诸多功德聚合而转起的状态。显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti ettha soti pasiddhiyaṃ, yo so samattiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ kampento anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, so loke atipākaṭoti ‘‘so bhagavā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavāti ca idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ, na guṇakittanaṃ. Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanameva. Iminā ca iminā cāti etena arahantiādipadānaṃ paccekaṃ anekaguṇagaṇaṃ paṭicca pavattabhāvaṃ dasseti.
“极远之远处”:以两个词来显示极其遥远,因为“极远性”即是“远性”本身。“摧灭了连同习气的诸烦恼”:以此显示世尊的阿拉汉果与独觉佛等不共,因为他们并未断除习气。所谓“习气”,即虽已无烦恼,但由于未能通达一切所知境等原因而导致三门运作有所欠缺的状态——那是长久被烦恼所覆藏的状态。如同有人长久戴着脚镣,即便脚镣已除,其行走仍因蜷缩的习性而受障碍,这便是被脚镣覆藏的状态。毕陵达瓦差等人之所以有“贱民”之类的称谓欠缺,应当理解为“习气”所致。“远离”:此处将“ā”音缩短,将“k”音变为带送气音的“h”,依语源学之理,应知“阿拉汉”一词得以成立。如上所述,以下各词也应各自依语源学之道理了知其词形的成立。“而此所谓轮回之轮”——这是连结之文。以“福”等之“等”字,摄集“非福行”与“不动行”。诸漏是无明等的因,故而为集,因此说“由漏集所成”。正如经中所说:“漏集故无明集”。异熟与所造色的种类,即三有本身,正是车——在这三有之车中。“轮回之轮”:即如上所述的烦恼、业、异熟之集起。显示巴利原文
Suvidūravidūreti dvīhi saddehi ativiya dūreti dasseti, suvidūratā eva hi vidūratā. Savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti iminā paccekabuddhādīhi asādhāraṇaṃ bhagavato arahattanti dasseti tesaṃ vāsanāya appahīnattā, vāsanā ca nāma nikkilesassāpi sakalañeyyānavabodhādidvārattayappayogaviguṇatāhetubhūto kilesanihito ākāro ciranigaḷitapādānaṃ nigaḷamokkhepi saṅkucitatāgamanahetuko nigaḷanihito ākāro viya. Yāya pilindavacchādīnaṃ vasalavohārādiviguṇatā hoti, ayaṃ vāsanāti gahetabbā. Ārakāti ettha ākārassa rassattaṃ ka-kārassa ca ha-kāraṃ sānussaraṃ katvā niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. Evaṃ uparipi yathārahaṃ niruttinayena padasiddhi veditabbā. Yañcetaṃ saṃsāracakkanti sambandho. Puññādīti ādi-saddena apuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhāre saṅgaṇhāti. Āsavā eva avijjādīnaṃ kāraṇattā samudayoti āha ‘‘āsavasamudayamayenā’’ti. ‘‘Āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) hi vuttaṃ. Vipākakaṭattārūpappabhedo tibhavo eva ratho, tasmiṃ tibhavarathe. Saṃsāracakkanti yathāvuttakilesakammavipākasamudayo.
“诸蕴之次第,及界与处;”
这无有间断的流转,即称为“轮回”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, ‘saṃsāro’ti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.618; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 apasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.523; udā. aṭṭha. 39; itivu. aṭṭha. 14, 58; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.67, 99; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 58; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.117; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 6) –
如上所说,轮回因其如车轮般旋转而称为“轮”,而此轮的一切辐条皆已斩断——这是句子间的关联。“由彼”即是由世尊。“觉”即是智,在此处,觉成为明净的核心,故称“觉坛”。“尽业之智锋”即指阿拉汉道智,为了显示此智斩断应断的、名为“行”的业,故应知这是以“尽业”为特征的修饰语所严饰。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutto saṃsārova cakkaṃ viya paribbhamanato cakkaṃ, tassa cakkassa sabbe arā hatāti sambandho. Anenāti bhagavatā. Bodhīti ñāṇaṃ, taṃ ettha maṇḍaṃ pasannaṃ jātanti bodhimaṇḍo. Kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasunti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ chinditabbaṃ abhisaṅkhārasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ paricchindatīti dassetuṃ kammakkhayakaravisesanavisiṭṭhaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
如此,以某些支分显示轮回轮,以其余支分——即作为果报的名色法——显示三有之车,并显示了安立在该车上的轮回轮辐如何被斩灭的方式之后,现在为显示仅由十二缘起支、完全脱离车喻的纯粹轮回轮,以及其斩灭辐条方式的种种差别,而说“或”等。此中,“无始”即随顺无始,其义为:无论如何随顺追溯,亦是不知终点。以无明为根本、以老死为终边——这是将行等十支依据辐条的含义合并在一起而说的。因为在缘起经文中,并未如此宣说它们各自有无明根本与老死终边。或者,也应知道这是指:它们各依其义有无明根本,并以各自作为自相的刹那老死为终边。如此,它们各别作为辐条也能成立。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ katipayaṅgehi saṃsāracakkaṃ tadavasesaṅgehi phalabhūtanāmarūpadhammehi tibhavarathañca tasmiṃ rathe yojitasaṃsāracakkārānaṃ hananappakārañca dassetvā idāni sabbehipi dvādasahi paṭiccasamuppādaṅgehi rathavirahitameva kevalaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassa araghātanappakārabhedañca dassetuṃ athavātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anamatagganti anu anu amataggaṃ, sabbathā anugacchantehipi aviññātakoṭikanti attho. Avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyosānattāti idaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ dasannaṃ arabhāvena ekattaṃ samāropetvāti vuttaṃ. Na hi tesaṃ paccekaṃ avijjāmūlakatā jarāmaraṇapariyosānatā ca atthi tathā paṭiccasamuppādapāḷiyaṃ avuttattā. Atha vā tesampi yathārahaṃ atthato avijjāmūlakattaṃ, attano attano lakkhaṇabhūtakhaṇikajarāmaraṇavasena tappariyosānatañca sandhāyetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Evañca tesaṃ paccekaṃ arabhāvo siddho hoti.
如此以一切方式显示轮回之轮后,现在为了说明世尊依何种智慧而能斩断此轮回之轮的辐条,由于论母中说“于缘把握中的慧即是法住智”,故以把握的方式显示了在有轮支分——无明等之中,缘与缘所生法的运作行相。之后,通过归纳其义,结合《无碍解道》经文所说的“如是,此无明为因”等,显示了法住智的自性相;又显示了此智在无明等中,以四种略说等方式运作的分别。此后,以“如是,世尊”等经文,显示了世尊依此法住智于一切行相通达了缘起;再后,为了以“以此法住智”等经文显示世尊以此智摧毁了轮回之轮的辐条,便在那里说了“于苦等中无知为无明”等。其中,“三处”指眼、耳、意三处。于“三触”等中,也是如此。应知由色爱等而有六爱身。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sabbākāraṃ saṃsāracakkameva dassetvā idāni yena ñāṇena imassa saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ chedo bhagavato siddho, tassa dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 4; 1.45) mātikā vuttattā bhavacakkāvayavesu avijjādīsu paccayapaccayuppannattā pariggahavasena pavattiākāraṃ dassetvā parato tassa atthassa nigamanavasena vuttena evamayaṃ avijjāhetūtiādikena paṭisambhidāpāḷisahitena (paṭi. ma. 1.45) pāṭhena sarūpato dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, tassa ca tesuyeva avijjādīsu catusaṅkhepādivasena pavattivibhāgañca dassetvā tato paraṃ iti bhagavātiādipāṭhena bhagavato tena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena paṭiccasamuppādassa sabbākārato paṭividdhabhāvaṃ dassetvā puna iminā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇenātiādinā bhagavato tena ñāṇena saṃsāracakkārānaṃ viddhaṃsitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ tattha dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ avijjātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tiṇṇaṃ āyatanānanti cakkhusotamanāyatanānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ. Esa nayo tiṇṇaṃ phassānantiādīsupi. Rūpataṇhādivasena cha taṇhākāyā eva veditabbā.
“天界成就”指生于欲界善趣的成就。“就在那里”意即正是以欲取为缘。“梵界成就”指生于色界梵天的成就。由于三地诸法所缘的一切贪爱都属于烦恼欲,因此有爱也就是欲取,故说“正是以欲取为缘而修习慈心”。在其余以取为根本的解说中,即指以见取、戒禁取、我语取为根本的解说。其中,此处的解说方法如下:在此,有人执持“无有他世,自我断灭”之见,他便以见取为缘,以身行恶行等;另一人执持“于某有中自我断灭”之见,为生于欲有、色有、无色有而造作种种善法等,这便是以见取为根本的解说;依此理趣,当知以我语取为根本的解说。又有一人,执持“依戒清净、依仪轨清净”,执取非清净道为“清净道”,以戒禁取为缘,以身行恶行等,于一切有中,当知这便是以戒禁取为根本的解说。显示巴利原文
Saggasampattinti kāmasugatīsu sampattiṃ. Tathevāti kāmupādānapaccayā eva. Brahmalokasampattinti rūpībrahmalokasampattiṃ. Tebhūmakadhammavisayassa sabbassāpi rāgassa kilesakāmabhāvato bhavarāgopi kāmupādānamevāti āha ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayāyeva mettaṃ bhāvetī’’ti. Sesupādānamūlikāsupīti diṭṭhupādānasīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānamūlikāsupi yojanāsu. Tatrāyaṃ yojanānayo – idhekacco ‘‘natthi paraloko ucchijjati attā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.85-86 atthato samānaṃ) diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so diṭṭhupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādinā, aparo ‘‘asukasmiṃ bhave attā ucchijjatī’’ti diṭṭhiṃ gahetvā kāmarūpārūpabhavūpapattiyā taṃ taṃ kusalaṃ karotītiādinā ca diṭṭhupādānamūlikā yojanā, imināva nayena attavādupādānamūlikā yojanā veditabbā. Aparo ‘‘sīlena suddhi vatena suddhī’’ti asuddhimaggaṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto sīlabbatupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādinā sabbabhavesu sīlabbatupādānamūlikā yojanā veditabbā.
现在,为了显示能摧破轮回之轮的法住智如何把握无明等缘,通过“于欲有中,无明是欲有中诸行的缘”等,已显示了无明等的缘的状态与缘所生的状态;为了以归结的方式显示此智在无明等中的运作方式,便引用《无碍解道》经文而说“如是此”等。然而在《清净道论注》中说:“现在,那位展示轮回之轮者,通过‘于欲有中,无明是欲有中诸行的缘’等,显示了无明等的缘的状态与诸行等的缘生状态;为了以归结的方式显示此,引用了《无碍解道》经文而说‘如是此’等。”《律藏注·义明灯》中也写有同样的文句。但在那里,通过‘于欲有中,无明’等,展示轮回之轮者所说的无明等的缘与缘生状态,并非如此,因为无明作为轮毂、作为根本等已于前文显示,而且后文也没有以轮相的作用来进行归结。又说“而且,为了以归结的方式显示那缘与缘生状态”,但在此处,并非以归结的方式将缘与缘生状态作为重点来显示,而是将依缘把握方式而起的法住智本身,以归结的方式显示了如前所述的缘把握的方式。正如所说:“如是,此无明是因,诸行是因所生,此二法皆为因所生——于缘把握中的慧即是法住智。”显示巴利原文
Idāni yassa saṃsāracakkārānaṃ ghātanasamatthassa dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa avijjādipaccayapaaggahākāraṃ dassetuṃ kāmabhave ca avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotītiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvo dassito, tameva ñāṇaṃ avijjādīsu pavattiākārena saddhiṃ paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento evamayantiādimāha. Visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘idāni yvāyaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena kāmabhave avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotītiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannabhāvo dassito, tameva paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento evamayantiādimāhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāratthadīpaniyā vinayaṭīkāyapi ayameva pāṭho likhito. Tattha ca kāmabhave ca avijjātiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvo saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena vutto na hoti tassa ca avijjā nābhi, mūlattātiādinā pubbeva dassitattā upari cakkarūpato payogattena upasaṃhārābhāvā ca. ‘‘Api ca tameva paccayapaccayuppannabhāvaṃ nigamanavasena dassento’’ti ca vuttaṃ, na cettha paccayapaccayuppannabhāvo nigamanavasena padhānattena dassito, atha kho paccayapariggahavasappavattaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇameva yathāvuttapaccayapariggahākārassa nigamanavasena dassitaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘evamayaṃ avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, ubhopete dhammā hetusamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Atītampi addhānaṃ. Anāgatampi addhānaṃ avijjā hetu…pe… dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.46) dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇameva padhānattena dassitaṃ. ‘‘Avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā’’tiādi pana paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 4; 1.45) vuccamānattā tassa paccayapariggahākāraparidīpanatthaṃ visayattena vuttaṃ, na padhānattena.
此处义为:“如是”即依前文所说之理:此无明是诸行之因,诸行由此因而生。“此二”者,因为此无明并非如他人所计执的自性、自在天等那样无因、恒常、坚固,而是依“由漏集起故无明集起”之说,其本身亦是有因、有为、无常的,故此无明与诸行二者皆由因而生。“如是”即依前文所说之理:此于缘把握中生起的慧,由于它如实运行于诸法之安住——即因——之中,故称为法住智。显示巴利原文
Ayañhettha attho – evanti anantare vuttanayena ayaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ hetu, saṅkhārā ca tena hetunā samuppannā. Ubhopeteti yasmā ayaṃ avijjā paraparikappitapakatiissarādi viya ahetukā niccā dhuvā na hoti, atha kho ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vacanato sayampi sahetukā saṅkhatā aniccāyeva hoti, tasmā ubhopete avijjāsaṅkhārā hetusamuppannāyeva. Itīti evaṃ yathāvuttanayena paccayapariggaṇhane yā paññā, taṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitisaṅkhāte kāraṇe yāthāvato pavattattā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ nāmāti.
在此,实际上仅是为了阐明智的所缘,才说到无明等之缘等状态,并非将其作为重点;此处真正被作为重点而说的乃是智本身。因此,仅是为了显示此智把握缘的方式,前文才通过“于欲有,无明……”等,说到了无明等之缘等状态;而在此处,也以归结的方式将其总摄,并非为了显示有轮。这是我个人的见解。显示巴利原文
Ettha hi ñāṇassa visayavibhāvanavaseneva avijjādīnaṃ paccayādibhāvo vutto, na padhānattena, ñāṇameva panettha padhānato vuttaṃ, tasmā etassa ñāṇassa paccayapariggahākāradassanatthameva heṭṭhāpi kāmabhave ca avijjātiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayādibhāvo vutto, idhāpi nigamanavasena upasaṃhaṭo, na bhavacakkadassanatthanti ayamettha attano mati.
而且,若未见到缘所生诸法,便不可能见到诸因之缘的状态。因此,在解说缘把握智时,也涵摄了“诸行为因所生”等缘生诸法,应如此理解。依此理趣,即依述及无明时所阐明的方法,应以“诸行为因,识为因所生”等方式,将直至老死为止的所有句节都详细展开。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca paccayuppannadhammesu adiṭṭhesu hetūnaṃ paccayabhāvopi na sakkā daṭṭhunti ‘‘saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā’’ti paccayapariggahañāṇaniddese (paṭi. ma. 1.45) paccayuppannadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Etena nayenāti avijjāyaṃ vuttanayena saṅkhārā hetu, viññāṇaṃ hetusamuppannantiādinā sabbāni jātipariyosānāni padāni vitthāretabbāni.
如此,在《无碍解道》的巴利文中,显示了法住智于无明等(缘起支)中生起的行相之后,现在为了显示该智对于诸缘,也以其他行相生起的方式,而说“在那里”等。其中,“在那里”是指于那些缘起支中。“略说”在此是指:无明等由于因的共性与果的共性而被略说,即归纳、统摄、部分、集合之意。然而,那种(略说)从生起上虽有两种,但因时间的差别而成为四种。“现在世”一词是承接而来的。爱、取、有被纳入,是由于烦恼与业的共性和它们不可分离的缘故。又因无明等烦恼轮与异熟法的法性相似,所以此处说为业轮,故言“此五法”等。在“异熟法”等中,虽只有业生的非色蕴才可称为异熟,但在名色等章节,由于无色(法)的主导性与多数,也将包含色的五果法称作“异熟轮”。它的意思是:以异熟为主的轮,或以异熟为多的轮。或者,在这里应将“异熟”一词视为“业生”的同义词。以生、老死为名目而说,意思是:因生、老死并未脱离胜义法,所以以它们为名目,即通过讲述它们,以此为门而作说示。“行相”的意思是:被呈现、被显示,即无明等的自性。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiyā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa avijjādīsu pavattiākāraṃ dassetvā idāni tassa tesu paccayesu aññehipi ākārehi pavattiākāraṃ dassetuṃ tatthātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu paṭiccasamuppādaṅgesu. Saṅkhippanti ettha avijjādayo hetusāmaññena phalasāmaññena vāti saṅkhepo, saṅgaho, koṭṭhāso rāsīti attho. So pana jātito duvidhopi kālabhedavasena catubbidho jāto. Paccuppanno addhāti anuvattati. Taṇhupādānabhavā gahitā kilesakammasāmaññato tadavinābhāvato ca. Avijjādikilesavaṭṭampi vipākadhammadhammatāsarikkhatāya idha kammavaṭṭamevāti āha ime pañca dhammātiādi. Vipākā dhammātiādīsu kammajaarūpakkhandhānameva vipākasaddavacanīyattepi nāmarūpādipadesu rūpamissampi phalapañcakaṃ arūpappadhānatāya ca tabbahulatāya ca ‘‘vipākavaṭṭa’’nti vuttaṃ. Vipākappadhānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ, vipākabahulaṃ vā vaṭṭanti attho. Kammajapariyāyo vā ettha vipāka-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Jātijarāmaraṇāpadesenāti paramatthadhammavinimuttajātijarāmaraṇaṃ nāma natthīti tadapadesena tesaṃ kathanena taṃmukhenāti attho. Ākirīyanti pakāsīyantīti ākārā, avijjādisarūpā, tato paccayākāratoti attho. Eko sandhīti avicchedappavattihetubhūto hetuphalasandhi, dutiyo phalahetusandhi, tatiyo hetuphalasandhīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如此,在显示了法住智于无明等中,以种种行相生起的方式之后,现在为了以《无碍解道》的方法,显示世尊以这些以及未说的一切行相而通达缘起,并显示该智即是法住智一词生起的因由,故作为总结而说“iti bhagavā”等。其中,“iti”是对已说方式的指称,因此说“四种略说”等。“以一切行相”是指:在此处,以“欲有中的无明是欲有中诸行的缘”等方式,藉由这里已说的、未说的,以及《缘起分别》等中出现的所有方式而通达。“taṃ”是指:世尊以此智如此了知的彼智。“以已知之义”即“以了知之义”。“以遍知之义”即“以通达之义”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇassa avijjādīsu anekehi pakārehi pavattiākāraṃ dassetvā idāni tehi, avuttehi ca sabbehi ākārehi bhagavato paṭiccasamuppādassa paṭividdhabhāvaṃ, tassa ca ñāṇassa dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇasaddappavattinimittataṃ paṭisambhidāpāḷinayena dassetuṃ upasaṃhāravasena iti bhagavātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ, tenāha catusaṅkhepantiādi. Sabbākāratoti idha kāmabhave ca avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayotiādinā idha vuttehi ca avuttehi ca paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 225 ādayo) āgatehi sabbehi pakārehi paṭivijjhati. Tanti yena ñāṇena bhagavā evaṃ jānāti, taṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ñātaṭṭhenāti jānanaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena.
现在,这个法住智已连同缘的把握行相之差别,被详细开示;为了显示它在杀敌(断除烦恼)方面的效用,而说“以此法住智”等。其中,“以法住智杀敌”是关联。如何杀呢?说“那些法”等。其相续是:以那个法住智如实了知那些无明等法,将它作为大金刚智武器;然后以此强力观智武器而生厌离,再以圣道武器离染、解脱,从而杀敌。因为圣道智从作用上、从通达苦集等谛上说,也称为“法住智”。显示巴利原文
Idāni yamidaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ paccayapariggahākārabhedehi saddhiṃ papañcato dassitaṃ, tasmiṃ araghāte etassa upayogitaṃ dassetuṃ iminā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇenātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena are hanīti sambandho. Kathanti? Āha ‘‘te dhamme’’tiādi. Te avijjādike dhamme mahāvajirañāṇāvudhena tena dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā tena balavavipassanāvudhena nibbindanto ariyamaggāvudhena virajjanto vimuccanto are hanīti yojanā. Ariyamaggañāṇampi hi kiccato samudayasaccādibodhato ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti vuccati.
“我以一一住处供养一一法蕴”的意思是:这种依住处而作的供养,虽就法蕴转起,实出于对世尊的敬爱;更因世尊以舍利等支提为其庄严,故其本身即是供养世尊。由此说“以世尊为对象”等。“他是烦恼敌之牟尼”一句中,此处有随韵音的省略,意为已断烦恼敌故。“是缘等之应供者”中,此处亦应视为有随韵音的省略。显示巴利原文
Ekekaṃ dhammakkhandhaṃ ekekavihārena pūjemīti dhammakkhandhaṃ ārabbha pavattāpi vihārakaraṇapūjā bhagavati pemeneva pavattattā sadhātukādicetiyapaṭimaṇḍitattā ca bhagavatova pūjāti āha bhagavantaṃ uddissātiādi. Kilesārīna so munīti ettha niggahītalopo, kilesārīnaṃ hatattāti attho. Paccayādīna cārahoti etthāpi niggahītalopo daṭṭhabbo.
“正等觉者”一词中,“saṃ-”音有“自己”义,故说“亲自”,意即不可被他人引导。“一切法”一词,因其未执取任何特定的对象范围而得成立。若无所限执取,则所取者便被理解为无所限制,正如“受戒者不施”一例。如此,由于不观待特殊意义,便可了知“佛陀”一词仅于作者本身上成就,而无须用动作语(业语)。此处于字面上毕竟只能得“因正确、亲自觉悟,故是正等觉者”之义;而“一切法”则依义所可得而取之,因觉悟的作用不可无对象。“应证知”者,即应以其无常等特相、依世间与出世间智而殊胜了知的四谛法。“应遍知”者,即以无常等而善了知,指苦圣谛。“应断”者即集谛。“应作证”者即灭谛。此处复数之说,是观待“有余依”等依同义语所安立的差别而说。显示巴利原文
Sammāsambuddhoti ettha saṃ-saddo sayanti atthe pavattatīti āha ‘‘sāma’’nti, aparaneyyo hutvāti attho. Sabbadhammānanti idaṃ kassaci visayavisesassa aggahitattā siddhaṃ. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati, yathā dikkhito na dadātīti. Evañca katvā atthavisesānapekkhā kattariyeva buddha-saddasiddhi veditabbā kammavacanicchāya abhāvato. ‘‘Sammā sāmaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho’’ti ettakameva hi idha saddato labbhati. Sabbadhammānanti idaṃ pana atthato labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na hi bujjhanakiriyā avisayā yujjati. Abhiññeyyeti lakkhaṇādito aniccādito ca abhivisiṭṭhena lokiyalokuttarañāṇena jānitabbe catusaccadhamme. Pariññeyyeti aniccādivasena paricchinditvā jānitabbaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccamāha. Pahātabbeti samudayasaccaṃ. Sacchikātabbeti nirodhasaccaṃ. Bahuvacananiddeso panettha sopādisesādikaṃ pariyāyasiddhaṃ bhedaṃ apekkhitvā kato.
在“应证知”等偈颂中,由于已取“应断”的集谛与“应修”的道谛这些因法,则其果的苦谛与灭谛便自然成立。因此应知,“应遍知”与“已遍知”、“应作证”与“已作证”于此处亦皆含摄其中。故说“故我是觉者”,其义为:四谛皆已为我觉悟,故所有应知者,我已觉了、已证知。显示巴利原文
Abhiññeyyanti gāthāya pahātabbabhāvetabbānaṃ samudayamaggasaccānaṃ hetudhammānaṃ gahaṇeneva tapphalānaṃ dukkhasaccanirodhasaccānampi siddhito pariññātabbañca pariññātaṃ sacchikātabbañca sacchikatanti idampettha saṅgahitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tasmā buddhosmī’’ti. Yasmā cattāripi saccāni mayā buddhāni, tasmā sabbampi ñeyyaṃ buddhosmi, abbhaññāsinti attho.
渴爱以种种所缘、种种希求的方式生起,故为苦的种种差别之根本因,因此说“以根本因的方式”。两者,指眼与眼的集。“不转起”指不转起的因相,并非仅仅无有之不转起;其状态、有缘等种种差别,皆已总摄其中。“了知灭”指通过作证现观而通达灭。逐句择取,即依“眼、眼的集”等逐项分别择取,并非仅从苦谛等共相而言,这是意旨。为显示渴爱亦因摄在行苦中而应遍知,故说“六渴爱身”,以明其苦谛性。然而,于彼有身中生起、能令生起的前世所成之渴爱,作为其根本因,应执取为集谛。遍处,指以遍为所缘的禅那。三十二行相,指发等及其所缘的禅那。九有,即欲有等三、有想有等三、一蕴有等三,合为九有。四禅,指不待所缘差别、依共相而说的四禅。异熟与唯作亦应随各处适宜而视为总摄。在此,应知善法是以渴爱为亲依止而令生起;唯作法,则以渴爱作为该有身之因。顺应的,此处无明是苦谛,令其生起的前世渴爱与诸漏是集谛,应如此结合。而在行等中,则唯以无明等作为集谛来结合。因此。显示巴利原文
Vicittavisayapatthanākārappavattiyā taṇhā dukkhavicittatāya padhānakāraṇanti āha ‘‘mūlakāraṇabhāvenā’’ti. Ubhinnanti cakkhussa taṃsamudayassa ca. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ, na abhāvamattaṃ. Tassa avatthuttā sappaccayattādianekabhedā sabbasaṅgahitā. Nirodhappajānanāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nirodhassa paṭivijjhanā. Ekekapaduddhārenāpīti cakkhu cakkhusamudayotiādinā ekekakoṭṭhāsaniddhāraṇenāpi, na dukkhasaccādisāmaññato evāti adhippāyo. Taṇhāyapi saṅkhāradukkhapariyāpannatāya pariññeyyattā dukkhasaccabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cha taṇhākāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana attabhāve sā uppajjati, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā samudayasaccanti gahetabbā. Kasiṇānīti kasiṇārammaṇāni jhānāni. Dvattiṃsākārāti kesādayo tadārammaṇajjhānāni ca. Nava bhavāti kāmabhavādayo tayo saññībhavādayo tayo ekavokārabhavādayo tayo cāti nava bhavā. Cattāri jhānānīti ārammaṇavisesaṃ anapekkhitvā sāmaññato cattāri jhānāni vuttāni. Vipākakiriyānampi yathārahaṃ sabbattha saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca kusaladhammānaṃ upanissayabhūtā taṇhāsamuṭṭhāpikāti veditabbā, kiriyadhammānaṃ pana tassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtā taṇhā. Anulomatoti ettha avijjā dukkhasaccaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā āsavā samudayasaccanti yojetabbaṃ. Saṅkhārādīsu pana avijjādayova samudayasaccabhāvena yojetabbā. Tenāti tasmā.
“明”,即令自己的境界被了知,故称为明。“具足故”,即具有故,或圆满故。此处指《庵婆咤经》中。意所成神通,此处依“比丘从此身化作另一身”之说,由身内禅那意令另一身生起的方式而转起,名为意所成神通,其义实为与禅那相应的慧。七正法,即信、惭、愧、多闻、精进、念、慧。走向不死之方,即欲度脱苦者所应见,走向不死即涅槃之方,以此显示诸行具足三学所含摄的圣道性,故为欲求涅槃者所必定希求。现在为了显示其明行具足与声闻等不共,故说“其中,明具足”等。其中,依漏尽明成就一切知性,依包含在作为行法的诸禅中的大悲定成就大悲性,故说“明……大悲性”。如同彼,此处“如”仅为小品词,义即如同其他明行具足的佛陀也教导,此亦如是。因此,即以此离恶导善。自苦等,“等”字摄取苦他、苦自他两者。不染着于诸有、不再来,即因已断者不再生起,故不再来。显示巴利原文
Vijjāti attano visayaṃ viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Sampannattāti samannāgatattā, sampuṇṇattā vā. Tatrāti ambaṭṭhasutte. Manomayiddhiyāti ettha ‘‘idha bhikkhu imamhā kāyā aññaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimminātī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.236) vuttattā sarīrabbhantarajhānamanena aññassa sarīrassa nibbattivasena pavattā manomayiddhi nāma, sā atthato jhānasampayuttā paññāyeva. Satta saddhammā nāma saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ vīriyaṃ sati paññā ca. Gacchati amataṃ disanti dukkhanittharaṇatthikehi daṭṭhabbato amataṃ nibbānameva disaṃ gacchati, iminā ca caraṇānaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahitaariyamaggabhāvato nibbānatthikehi ekaṃsena icchitabbataṃ dasseti. Idānissā vijjācaraṇasampadāya sāvakādiasādhāraṇataṃ dassetuṃ tattha vijjāsampadātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āsavakkhayavijjāvasena sabbaññutā sijjhati, caraṇadhammabhūtesu jhānesu antogadhāya mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā vasena mahākāruṇikatā sijjhatīti āha ‘‘vijjā…pe… mahākāruṇikata’’nti. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, yathā aññopi vijjācaraṇasampanno buddho niyojeti, tathā ayampīti attho. Tenāti anatthaparivajjanaatthaniyojanena. Attantapādayoti ādi-saddena parantapaubhayantapā gahitā. Asajjamāno bhavesu apaccāgacchantoti pahīnānaṃ punānuppattito na puna upagacchanto.
此处,依处语用于应成就的适当言语说示中。“非实”,即非真实义。“不真”,是彼的同义词。“伴随不利”,即伴有离间等过失。“善说故”,即因有美妙言辞故;“说”为语,即言说,这是义。有美妙言辞之语者,应说为“善说”,依语法规则将da变为ta,故说为“善逝”。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti yuttavācābhāsane sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ. Atacchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anatthasaṃhitanti pisuṇādidosayuttaṃ. Sammāgadattāti sundaravacanattā, gadanaṃ gado, kathananti attho. Sundaro gado vacanamassāti ‘‘sugado’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘sugato’’ti vuttaṃ.
“自性”即苦的自性。“世间”指蕴等世间。为显示如前所述之义,经中接着说“其中”等。这里的“其中”,是指被称为世间边的涅槃中。“彼”即世间边——我不说可在器世间以身体行走而了知、可证得,应如此结合。这也是因为罗希陀天子曾问,是否可借身体行走而到达世间边,故有此说。所谓“未到达世间边”,是就蕴等世间而说。显示巴利原文
Sabhāvatoti dukkhasabhāvato. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ suttato āha yatthātiādi. Tattha yatthāti yasmiṃ lokantasaṅkhāte nibbāne. Tanti lokassantaṃ, okāsaloke kāyagamanena ñātabbaṃ pattabbanti nāhaṃ vadāmīti yojanā. Idañca rohitadevaputtena lokassa kāyagativasena antagamanassa pucchitattā vuttaṃ. Appatvā lokassantanti khandhādilokaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
你以脚步在器世间游遍,我则示现以智行在有限之处便能到达。为显明此义,故说“复次”等。其中,“在这仅一寻的躯体中”即指身体,以此显示色蕴。“有想”是以想为首,指受等三蕴。“有识”指识蕴。“世间”即蕴等世间,义为苦。“世间灭”即依涅槃而世间灭,或即是涅槃。涅槃对于某些人虽是灭,但并非他们的境界,然通过近喻而似依彼身,故说“于仅一寻的躯体中,我亦施设世间灭”,如同“于眼,世间为可爱相、可乐相,此渴爱灭时即灭”等处。“何时”即任何时。“未达”即未以最上道证得。因此,即因此不能以身体行走到达。“确实”只是小品词,或表决定义。“世间解”即从自性等方面了知蕴等者。因为已现观四谛法,故为寂止者,或是已寂止烦恼者,这是它的意思。不希求、不渴望,因为没有结生。显示巴利原文
Kinte padasā okāsalokaparibbhamanena, parimitaṭṭhāne eva taṃ ñāṇagamanena gacchantānaṃ dassemīti dassento api cātiādimāha. Tattha byāmamatte kaḷevareti sarīre. Tena rūpakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Sasaññimhīti saññāsīsena vedanādayo tayo khandhe. Samanaketi viññāṇakkhandhaṃ. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ, dukkhanti attho. Lokanirodhanti nibbānena lokassa nirujjhanaṃ, nibbānameva vā. Adesampi hi nibbānaṃ yesaṃ nirodhāya hoti, upacārato tannissitaṃ viya hotīti ‘‘byāmamatte kaḷevare lokanirodhampi paññapemī’’ti vuttaṃ, cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ, sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā nirujjhamānā nirujjhatītiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.401; vibha. 204) viya. Kudācananti kadācipi. Appatvāti aggamaggena anadhigantvā. Tasmāti yasmā taṃ gamanena pattuṃ na sakkā, tasmā. Haveti nipātamattaṃ, ekaṃsatthe vā . Lokavidūti sabhāvādito khandhādijānanako. Catusaccadhammānaṃ abhisamitattā samitāvī, samitakilesoti vā attho. Nāsīsati na pattheti appaṭisandhikattā.
如此略说世间之后,现在为了详说而宣说“复次,三世间”等。其中,有情世间是系属于根的诸蕴的聚集与相续。彼因对色等执着故名为“有情”,又因业、烦恼及其异熟在此中世间,故名为“世间”。器世间是不系属于根的时节所生色的聚集与相续。彼因是有情诸行的依处,故名为“器”;又因彼之依处及所依者在此中世间,故名为“世间”。而系属于根与不系属于根的一切取蕴,由于依缘而造作的意义及坏灭的意义,故称为“行世间”。能带来自己的果,故为食,即缘。依彼而住立为其本性,生起后直至坏灭而转起为其本性,故为食住立者,即一切有为法。对一切有情,也因随应所化者而依于人施设教说,故实际上取诸行而说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhepato lokaṃ dassetvā idāni vitthārato taṃ dassetuṃ api ca tayo lokātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha indriyabaddhānaṃ khandhānaṃ samūhasantānabhūto sattaloko. So hi rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya ‘‘satto’’ti ca, lokiyanti ettha kammakilesā tabbipākā cāti ‘‘loko’’ti ca vuccati. Anindriyabaddhānaṃ utujarūpānaṃ samūhasantānabhūto okāsaloko. So hi sattasaṅkhārānaṃ ādhārato ‘‘okāso’’ti ca, lokiyanti ettha tassādhārā ca ādheyyabhūtāti ‘‘loko’’ti ca pavuccati. Indriyānindriyabaddhā pana sabbeva upādānakkhandhā paccayehi saṅkhataṭṭhena lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena ca ‘‘saṅkhāraloko’’ti ca vuccati. Āharati attano phalanti āhāro, paccayo. Tena tiṭṭhanasīlā uppajjitvā yāva bhaṅgā pavattanasīlāti āhāraṭṭhitikā, sabbe saṅkhatadhammā. Sabbe sattāti ca imināpi veneyyānurūpato puggalādhiṭṭhānattā desanāya saṅkhārāva gahitā.
“日月所行之处”,指日月运行、周轉的範圍。“照耀”,謂其照耀之因、發光之因,此處為從格。“照亮諸方”:凡黑暗消除,一切方向皆得顯現;或者,“諸方”為受格複數。因此,意思是:正在照耀的日月,照亮所及的一切方向。“彼千重世界”,即以此量度,具有千種樣貌的器世間,意為千個輪圍世界。“此處”,即在千個輪圍世界中。“自在”,指稱為神通的自在力在運行。显示巴利原文
Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā parivattanti pavattanti. Virocanāti tesaṃ virocanahetu obhāsanahetūti hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ. Disā bhantīti sabbā disā yāvatā vigatandhakārā paññāyanti. Atha vā disāti upayogabahuvacanaṃ. Tasmā virocamānā candimasūriyā yattakā disā bhanti obhāsentīti attho. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakena pamāṇena sahassappakāro okāsaloko, sahassacakkavāḷānīti attho. Etthāti sahassacakkavāḷe. Vasoti iddhisaṅkhāto vaso vattatīti attho.
“彼亦”,即三種世間。“對此”,即由此世尊完全了知行世間,如此連接。“一種世間”:如前所說,由於一切行法皆依緣而轉,以此共性,行世間為一種、單一類;其餘可類推。一切處唯以世間法為世間,因出世間法非所應遍知故。作為取著所緣的諸蘊,是取蘊。“七識住”,即依種種方式生起的眾生類:身異想異、身異想一、身一想異、身一想一,以及下三無色。這七類眾生,識安住於此,故稱識住。其中,身各異者,名身異;想各異者,名想異。此處以想為首,指結生識,其餘類推。显示巴利原文
Tampīti tividhampi lokaṃ. Assāti anena bhagavatā saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā viditoti sambandho. Eko lokoti yvāyaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayena sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ paccayāyattavuttito tena sāmaññena saṅkhāraloko eko ekavidho, esa nayo sesesupi. Sabbatthāpi lokiyadhammāva lokoti adhippetā lokuttarānaṃ pariññeyyattābhāvā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti tathā tathā samuppannā pajāyeva vuccanti. Nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, heṭṭhimā ca tayo āruppāti imā sattavidhā pajāyeva viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati etthāti viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nāma. Tattha nānattaṃ kāyo etesamatthīti nānattakāyā. Nānattaṃ saññā etesanti nānattasaññino. Saññāsīsenettha paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ gahitaṃ, esa nayo sesesupi.
其中,所有人及六欲天,名為“身異想異”。因其身體彼此不同,結生想亦有九種不同。初禪三地中的梵身天,以及四惡趣眾生,名為“身異想一”。其中,梵眾天等三者身體彼此不同,但結生想因初禪果報而唯一;惡趣眾生亦然,然其結生想皆是無因不善果報。二禪地的少光天、無量光天、光音天,名為“身一想異”。因其身體皆同一量度,但結生想因二禪、三禪果報而有不同。三禪地的少淨天等三天、四禪地除無想有情外的廣果天,以及五淨居天,此九地眾生,名為“身一想一”。然而,不因光明差異而取身異,唯因形態差異而取。無想有情因無識,不列入識住之數。非想非非想處,如其想極其微細,識亦極其微細,非有識非無識,故不列入具有明顯識作用的識住中。因此,僅取其餘空無邊處等三無色。應知與这些合為七識住。显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbamanussā ca cha kāmāvacaradevā ca nānattakāyā nānattasaññino nāma. Tesañhi aññamaññaṃ visadisatāya nānā kāyo, paṭisandhisaññā ca navavidhatāya nānā. Tīsu paṭhamajjhānabhūmīsu brahmakāyikā ceva catūsu apāyesu sattā ca nānattakāyā ekattasaññino nāma. Tesu hi brahmapārisajjādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi sarīraṃ aññamaññaṃ visadisaṃ, paṭisandhisaññā pana paṭhamajjhānavipākavasena ekāva, tathā āpāyikānampi, tesaṃ pana sabbesaṃ akusalavipākāhetukāva paṭisandhisaññā. Dutiyajjhānabhūmikā ca parittābha appamāṇābha ābhassarā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino nāma. Tesañhi sabbesaṃ ekappamāṇova kāyo, paṭisandhisaññā pana dutiyatatiyajjhānavipākavasena nānā hoti. Tatiyajjhānabhūmiyaṃ parittasubhādayo tayo, catutthajjhānabhūmiyaṃ asaññasattavajjitā vehapphalā, pañca ca suddhāvāsāti navasu bhūmīsu sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino nāma. Ābhānānattena pana sabbattha kāyanānattaṃ na gayhati, saṇṭhānanānatteneva gayhatīti. Asaññasattā viññāṇābhāvena viññāṇaṭṭhitisaṅkhyaṃ na gacchanti. Nevasaññā nāsaññāyatanaṃ pana yathā saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassāpi sukhumattā nevaviññāṇaṃ nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā paribyattaviññāṇakiccavantesu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu na gayhati. Tasmā sesāni ākāsānañcāyatanādīni tīṇiyeva gahitāni, tehi saddhiṃ imā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti veditabbā.
“八世间法”指得、失、誉、毁、讥、称、乐、苦,这八者因是世间的本性,故名世间法。应知,此处由得、失等缘而生起的随喜与违逆,也以‘得’等名称来指称。“九有情居”即前文所说的七识住,加上无想有情与第四无色界,合为九种。有情居住于此,故称有情居,即有情类;在义理上,应知这是以行于世间的含义,来统摄如此转起的众生类。“十处”指除去法处和意处的十处。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho alābho yaso ayaso nindā pasaṃsā sukhaṃ dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokassa sabhāvattā lokadhammā. Lābhālābhādipaccayā uppajjanakā panettha anurodhavirodhā vā lābhādisaddehi vuttāti veditabbā. Nava sattāvāsāti heṭṭhā vuttā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo eva asaññasattacatutthāruppehi saddhiṃ ‘‘nava sattāvāsā’’ti vuccanti. Sattā āvasanti etthāti sattāvāsā, sattanikāyo, atthato tathā pavattā pajā eva idha saṅkhāralokabhāvena gayhantīti veditabbā. Dasāyatanānīti dhammāyatanamanāyatanavajjitāni dasa.
在此,以见三有中味著的方式,唯说三受为世间;同样地,以见缘的方式,唯说四食;以见执取我相的方式,唯说六内处;以见粗想之有的方式,唯说七识住;以见随喜违逆的方式,或者说八世间法;以见粗显之处的方式,唯说十处为世间。在义理上,由含摄了这些,其所依、所系属、所缘的一切三界名色法,便已被含摄在内。应知,其余的一种等分类,则是依其自性而被含摄在内。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca tīsu bhavesu assādadassanavasena tisso vedanāva lokabhāvena vuttā, tathā paccayadassanavasena cattārova āhārā. Attaggāhanimittadassanavasena cha ajjhattikāneva āyatanāni. Thūlasaññībhavadassanavasena satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyova, anurodhavirodhadassanavasena aṭṭha lokadhammā vā, thūlāyatanadassanavasena dasāyatanāneva lokabhāvena vuttāni. Tesaṃ gahaṇeneva tannissayatappaṭibaddhā tadārammaṇā sabbe tebhūmakā nāmarūpadhammā atthato gahitā eva honti. Sesehi pana ekavidhādikoṭṭhāsehi sarūpeneva te gahitāti veditabbaṃ.
在“知心性向”等句中,所谓心性向,即心在此处安住。即使心在其他所缘转起之后,也会自然进入并安住之处,即是心性向。它分为两种:轮转性向与还灭性向。其中,轮转性向又依常见与断见而分为两种。还灭性向则依称为观智的随顺忍,以及称为道智的如实智,而分为两种。如所说:显示巴利原文
Āsayaṃ jānātītiādīsu āhacca cittaṃ ettha setīti āsayo, aññasmiṃ visaye pavattitvāpi cittaṃ yattha sarasena pavisitvā tiṭṭhati, so vaṭṭāsayo vivaṭṭāsayoti duvidho. Tattha vaṭṭāsayopi sassatucchedadiṭṭhivasena duvidho. Vivaṭṭāsayo pana vipassanāsaṅkhātā anulomikā khanti, maggasaṅkhātaṃ yathābhūtañāṇañcāti duvidho. Yathāha –
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikaṃ; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
世尊于众生未转起之刹那,即以一切方式遍知此二种意乐。“随眠”即欲贪随眠等七种随眠。“行”即于“善行、恶行”中所说;或者,“行”即行为,指贪等六种根本行为,由交往、集会而有种种。“志趣”即性向,心随乐于各处而倾向,此有二种:劣志趣与胜志趣。依此亲近恶戒等劣志趣者,是为劣志趣;依此亲近胜志趣者,是为胜志趣。世尊以一切方式了知此二种志趣。“尘垢少者”,即贪等尘垢微少者,他们仍有随眠贪等过失;“尘垢多者”,即贪等过失增盛者。具足锐利或迟钝的信等根者,为利根与钝根。应知具足前述意乐等之善与不善者,为善行相与恶行相。容易使入正性决定者,为易教化者;相反者为难教化者。具足证悟道果之亲依止者,为堪能者;相反者为不堪能者。当知如此,由了知众生相续中的法之差别,即了知众生世间,因为离法之外别无众生。显示巴利原文
Etaṃ duvidhampi āsayaṃ sattānaṃ appavattikkhaṇeyeva bhagavā sabbathā jānāti. Anusayanti kāmarāgānusayādivasena sattavidhaṃ anusayaṃ. Caritanti ‘‘sucaritaduccarita’’nti niddese vuttaṃ. Atha vā caritanti cariyā, te rāgādayo cha mūlacariyā, saṃsaggasannipātavasena anekavidhā honti. Adhimuttinti ajjhāsayadhātuṃ, tattha tattha cittassa abhirucivasena ninnatā, sā duvidhā hīnādhimutti paṇītādhimuttīti. Yāya dussīlādike hīnādhimuttike sevanti, sā hīnādhimutti. Yāya paṇītādhimuttike sevanti, sā paṇītādhimutti. Taṃ duvidhampi adhimuttiṃ bhagavā sabbākārato jānāti. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, anussadarāgādidosā. Ussadarāgādidosā mahārajakkhā. Upanissayabhūtehi tikkhehi saddhādiindriyehi mudukehi ca samannāgatā tikkhindriyā mudindriyā ca. Heṭṭhā vuttehi āsayādīhi sundarehi asundarehi ca samannāgatā svākārā dvākārā ca veditabbā. Sammattaniyāmaṃ viññāpetuṃ sukarā suviññāpayā, viparītā duviññāpayā. Maggaphalapaṭivedhāya upanissayasampannā bhabbā, viparītā abhabbā. Evaṃ sattasantānagatadhammavisesajānaneneva sattalokopi vidito dhammavinimuttassa sattassa abhāvāti veditabbaṃ.
一个轮围……乃至……五十由旬,此处“有”为剩余部分。就周长而言,其量度被称为剩余部分。轮围的全部圆周为三十六万……乃至……百,应如此配合。其中:在轮围中,有二十万又四那由他由旬,即此所谓“此大地”厚度的量,如彼之量,应如此配合。其中,“如此”应被视为动作的修饰语。承载之水即以如此如此之量而安住,应如此配合。在此处:于轮围中。沉入与高出,即既沉入且高出。大,指巨大。由旬之百高,雪山为五,即高五百由旬,此为其高度。其干围三乘十五由旬,即十五由旬之量。名为树者:即名为树的阎浮,应如此配合。从一切方面,即一切部分,长宽各百由旬,此为其宽度,这是含义。以其威力:即因其巨大性、劫住等威力的缘故。围绕彼一切,世界界立:即围绕前述一切,轮围石环立起,此即名为一世界界,这是含义,说ma音为连声。另一种配合为:围绕彼一切世界界,此轮围石环而立,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ…pe… paññāsañca yojanānīti ettha hotīti seso. Parikkhepato pamāṇaṃ vuccatīti seso. Cakkavāḷassa sabbaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ chattiṃsa satasahassāni…pe… satāni ca hontīti yojetabbaṃ. Tatthāti cakkavāḷe, dve satasahassāni cattāri nahutāni ca yojanāni yāni ettakaṃ ettakappamāṇaṃ bahalattena ayaṃ vasundharā saṅkhātāti yojanā. Tattha ettakanti kiriyāvisesanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sandhārakaṃ jalaṃ ettakaṃ ettakappamāṇaṃ hutvā patiṭṭhitanti yojanā. Etthāti cakkavāḷe. Ajjhogāḷhuggatāti ajjhogāḷhā ca uggatā ca. Brahāti mahantā. Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañcāti yojanānaṃ pañcasatāni ucco ubbedho. Tipañcayojanakkhandhaparikkhepāti pannarasayojanappamāṇakkhandhapariṇāhā. Nagavhayāti rukkhābhidhānā jambūti yojanā. Samantatoti sabbasobhāgena, āyāmato ca vitthārato ca satayojanavitthārāti attho. Yassānubhāvenāti yassā mahantatākappaṭṭhāyikādippakārena pabhāvena. Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhitoti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sabbampi taṃ parikkhipitvā cakkavāḷasiluccayo ṭhito, ayaṃ ekā lokadhātu nāmāti attho, ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto. Atha vā taṃ sabbaṃ lokadhātuṃ parikkhipitvā ayaṃ cakkavāḷasiluccayo ṭhitoti yojetabbaṃ.
其中:即在那世界界中。三十三天宫,即三十三天城。阿修罗宫,即阿修罗城。阿鼻大地狱亦复一万由旬,然而它位于四铁壁之间,长宽各百由旬,周围连同十六近边地狱,共为一万由旬,应如此了知。在其间:即那些轮围之间。由于存在于诸世界、诸轮围之间的空隙,故为世界中间地狱。正如三辆车的车轮或三片叶子靠近放置时,其间出现空隙一样,在每三个轮围之间,各有一世界中间地狱,量八千由旬,为寒地狱,由众生的不善异熟所生。无边:即横向于八方,轮围如虚空般无边无际。然而上方与下方则是有边的。以无边的佛智,此处应知:因其具有通达无量所知的能力,故智称为“无边”。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tassaṃ lokadhātuyaṃ. Tāvatiṃsabhavananti tidasapuraṃ. Asurabhavananti asurapuraṃ. Avīcimahānirayo ca tathā dasasahassayojano, so pana catunnaṃ lohabhittīnamantarā yojanasatāyāmavitthāropi samantā soḷasahi ussadanirayehi saddhiṃ dasasahassayojano vuttoti veditabbo. Tadanantaresūti tesaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu. Lokānaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antare vivare bhavattā lokantarikā. Tiṇṇañhi sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā āsannaṭṭhapitānaṃ antarasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu ekeko lokantarikanirayo aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇo sītanarako sattānaṃ akusalavipākena nibbattati. Anantānīti tiriyaṃ aṭṭhasu disāsu cakkavāḷāni ākāso viya anantāni. Uddhaṃ pana adho ca antāneva. Anantena buddhañāṇenāti ettha anantañeyyapaṭivedhasāmatthiyayogatova ñāṇaṃ ‘‘ananta’’nti veditabbaṃ.
“自”:这是属格用于表达主格的含义,意为“从自己”。“以功德比自己更殊胜者”为关联,此处用“更”字,是为释“无上”一词的含义而作,并非实有某殊胜者存在。因为在含天界在内的世间,连与如来相似者尚不可得,何况相等者?故云“以戒德亦无等”等。其中:与无等的正等觉者相等,为无等等;无可比拟者,为无譬。其余诸词亦同此理。其中,譬喻之量即比拟,相似的譬喻即映像。应知以对立而立的比拟之人。“自”,即从自己。“人应调”等中,应被调伏者为应调,本应说“应调人”,却将修饰语后置说为“人应调”。此处说“人”是以殊胜而言,因女人亦应被调伏。通过去除嗔恚之毒,使其成为无害者。“义句”,即能显了义理的句子,意为语句。以一句而彰显导师调御丈夫之德不共于他人,故说“世尊”等。“八方”,指八等至。“无著”,即因达到自在而无所著行。显示巴利原文
Attanoti nissakke sāmivacanametaṃ, attatoti attho. Guṇehi attano visiṭṭhatarassāti sambandho, taraggahaṇañcettha anuttaroti padassa atthaniddesavasena kataṃ, na visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthitāya. Sadevake hi loke sadisakappopi nāma koci tathāgatassa natthi, kuto sadiso, tenāha sīlaguṇenāpi asamotiādi. Tattha asamehi sammāsambuddhehi samo asamasamo. Natthi paṭimā etassāti appaṭimo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tattha upamāmattaṃ paṭimā, sadisūpamā paṭibhāgo. Yugaggāhavasena ṭhito paṭimo puggaloti veditabbo. Attanāti attato. Purisadammetiādīsu damitabbā dammā, ‘‘dammapurisā’’ti vattabbe visesanassa paranipātaṃ katvā ‘‘purisadammā’’ti vuttaṃ, purisaggahaṇañcettha ukkaṭṭhavasena itthīnampi dametabbato. Nibbisā katā dosavisassa vinodanena. Atthapadanti atthābhibyañjanakaṃ padaṃ, vākyanti attho. Ekapadabhāvena ca anaññasādhāraṇo satthu purisadammasārathibhāvo dassito hoti, tenāha bhagavā hītiādi. Aṭṭha disāti aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Asajjamānāti vasībhāvappattiyā nissaṅgacārā.
“现法”指现前可见的自身存在,致力于此者,名为“现法者”,意指此世的利益。由于业与烦恼而应往、应去之处,为“来世”,即他世;致力于彼者,名为“来世者”,意指他世的利益。最上、最殊胜的利益,为“第一义”,即涅槃。与利益同行者,为“商队”,即带着货物资本为经商而前往他国的一群人。拥有此商队者,为“商主”,即商队的首领。这是依词源学所作的解释。世尊如同商主,故说“导师世尊,乃是商队之主”。现在,为了以释义文句的方式显示其义,而说“如商队首领”等。其中,“于商队”即于商队众人之中。“何处有水可渡”之处,名为“旷野”,即无水、险恶的林野之地。那些被贼等占据的林野之处,也因为难行而与之相似,故通常也称作旷野。因此,在总说“渡旷野”之后,为再作展开,而说“贼旷野”等。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo, tattha niyuttoti diṭṭhadhammiko, idhalokattho. Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato samāgantabbato samparāyo , paraloko, tattha niyuttoti samparāyiko, paralokattho. Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, nibbānaṃ. Saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlena vāṇijjāya desantaraṃ gacchanto janasamūho. So assa atthīti satthā, satthavāhoti niruttinayena. So viya bhagavāti āha ‘‘satthā, bhagavā satthavāho’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ niddesapāḷinayena dassetuṃ yathā satthavāhotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattheti satthike jane. Kaṃ udakaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, nirudako araññappadeso. Corādīhi adhiṭṭhitaaraññappadesāpi duggamanaṭṭhena taṃsadisatāya kantārātveva niruḷhāti sāmaññato ‘‘kantāraṃ tāretī’’ti vatvā taṃ vivaranto corakantārantiādimāha.
“世尊”一词,此处是属格用作主格,意思是“从世尊那里听闻法”。就像“从和尚学习”的用法一样,也可以理解为“于世尊近处”。所谓“于声中取了相”,意思是:由于过去诸佛出世时熏习了正法的听闻,他便在法音之中把握到了这样的行相——“这就是法”。正是靠着过去的串习,像这类的畜生,如蝙蝠等,才会对闻法等生起净信。若非如此,则一切畜生都应能生起净信了。倘若它们真能生起,那么,当世尊在无边轮围世界中,能于同一刹那以神变力令一切众生听闻佛法时,一切众生便早应获得解脱。然而,实际上,只有那些天人、人类、龙、金翅鸟等,本性即具有“业自作智”之类素质的有情,即使先前并无近依止,也能由世尊闻正法等,而生起离转依止的净信;其余有情则不能。应当如此理解。关于“哎呀,我也名为……”,应当知道:仅凭“我观见自己如何生于此,得知是蛙身”——单是“哎呀,我也名为……”这一声惊叹,便已成立,因此未曾明说。所谓“燃烧”,即剧烈燃烧、闪耀之义。在“我是蛙”偈颂中,“于水”是表明其出生之处,由此遮止了它是旱地之蛙的可能。而对于那些虽生于水中,却如龟等一样也有陆地行境的,为遮止此义,故说“水行境”,意即于水中游行者。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatoti nissakke sāmivacanaṃ, bhagavantato dhammassavanenāti attho. Yathā ‘‘upajjhāyato ajjhetī’’ti, bhagavato santiketi vā attho. Sare nimittaṃ aggahesīti pubbabuddhuppādesu saddhammassavanaparicayena ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare ākāraṃ gaṇhi. Pubbābhiyogavaseneva hi īdisānaṃ tiracchānānaṃ dhammassavanādīsu pasādo uppajjati vagguliādīnaṃ viya. Itarathā sabbatiracchānānampi tathā pasāduppattippasaṅgato. Yadi hi uppajjeyya, bhagavā anantacakkavāḷesu sabbasattānampi ekakkhaṇe sappāṭihāriyadhammaṃ sāvetuṃ sakkotīti sabbasattānampi ito pubbeva vimuttippasaṅgo siyā. Ye pana devamanussanāgasupaṇṇādayo pakatiyāva kammassakataññāṇādiyuttā honti, teyeva pubbe anupanissayāpi bhagavato saddhammassavanādinā paṭhamaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ pasādaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkonti, na itareti gahetabbaṃ. Are ahampi nāmāti ettha ‘‘kutohaṃ idha nibbattoti oloketvā maṇḍūkabhāvatoti ñatvā’’ti idaṃ ettakampi are ahampi nāmāti vimhayavacaneneva sijjhatīti avuttanti veditabbaṃ. Jalanti jalanto vijjotamāno. Maṇḍūkohanti gāthāya udaketi sañjātaṭṭhānadassanaṃ, tena thalamaṇḍūkatā nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Udake jātānampi kacchapādīnaṃ thalagocaratāpi atthīti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti vuttaṃ, udakasañcārīti attho.
依解脱边际智之力而说:在此,能从一切烦恼中究竟解脱,故名为“解脱”,即最上之道;此最上道的边际,即最上之果;安住于彼处的智慧,即“解脱边际”,它与一切知智一同,即是一切佛智。现在,为了显示“正等觉”一词与“佛陀”一词的差别,故而说“或者由于……”等。因为,以“正等觉”一词宣说了导师在证悟智慧方面的威力,而以“佛陀”一词,则也宣说了其在教说智慧方面的威力,所以才有“也令其他有情觉悟”等语。显示巴利原文
Vimokkhantikañāṇavasenāti ettha sabbaso kilesehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, aggamaggo, tassa anto, aggaphalaṃ, tattha bhavaṃ vimokkhantikaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ sabbampi buddhañāṇaṃ. Idāni sammāsambuddhapadato buddhapadassa visesaṃ dassetuṃ yasmā vātiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāsambuddhapadena hi satthu paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvo vutto, iminā pana buddhapadena desanāñāṇānubhāvopi, tenāha aññepi satte bodhesītiādi.
“功德殊胜、众生中最上、应受尊重之词”指:此“薄伽梵”一词,是出于对那位具足戒等一切功德、因此为一切众生中最上、最尊者的尊重而称说的词。“最胜”即表示最胜之词,因其与最胜功德相伴。或者,“被说”即词,即义,其义为“最胜”。“最上”一词,此处亦同此理。“具足尊重”中,尊重的状态即尊重,或因具足尊重的功德而作尊重,即尊重;由于具有与声闻等不共的、重大的尊重,故为“具足尊重”。或者,也可解释为:因为是世间一切众生的导师,故为“尊”,且因此具足尊重。显示巴利原文
Guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacananti sabbehi sīlādiguṇehi visiṭṭhassa tato eva sabbasattehi uttamassa garuno gāravavasena vuccamānavacanamidaṃ bhagavāti. Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Uttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Garugāravayuttoti ettha garubhāvo gāravaṃ, garuguṇayogato garukaraṇaṃ vā gāravaṃ, tena sāvakādīnaṃ asādhāraṇatāya garubhūtena mahantena gāravena yuttoti garugāravayutto. Atha vā garu ca sabbalokassa sikkhakattā teneva gāravayutto cātipi yojetabbaṃ.
依状态而了知,名为状态性(āvatthika)。同样,依性别特征而了知,名为性别性(liṅgika)。依相状而得知,名为相状性(nemittika)。不依赖任何相状,仅借由言说方式而不加留意地说出,名为偶然所生(adhiccasamuppanna),因此说“不考虑词义”。依意愿而说出,名为随意性(yādicchaka)。在此,外在的棍杖等是性别特征(liṅga),内在的三明等是相状(nimitta)。或者,多数人所见、普遍易知的是性别特征,与此相反的则是相状,应如此理解。所谓“亲证施设”(sacchikāpaññatti),是指以一切法的亲证为因而建立的施设。或者,“亲证施设”是指依现量成立的施设。因为该施设是以那些功德为因的,而那些功德是导师以现量亲证的,所以如同那些功德一样,该施设也被称为“亲证”的,并非是对他人而言,只是随顺世俗的言说,这是它的意趣所在。所谓“以功德为因的相状性名称”,是指以那些功德为因相,此名称便成为相状性的。说“他们说”,是就法将(舍利弗)……显示巴利原文
Avatthāya viditaṃ āvatthikaṃ. Evaṃ liṅgikaṃ. Nimittato āgataṃ nemittikaṃ. Adhicca yaṃkiñci nimittaṃ adhivacanavasena anapekkhitvā pavattaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ, tenāha ‘‘vacanatthamanapekkhitvā’’ti. Yadicchāya āgataṃ yādicchakaṃ. Ettha ca bāhiraṃ daṇḍādi liṅgaṃ, abbhantaraṃ tevijjādi nimittaṃ. Pacurajanavisayaṃ vā dissamānaṃ liṅgaṃ, tabbiparītaṃ nimittanti veditabbaṃ. Sacchikāpaññattīti sabbadhammānaṃ sacchikiriyānimittā paññatti. Atha vā sacchikāpaññattīti paccakkhasiddhā paññatti. Yaṃguṇanimittā hi sā, te guṇā satthu paccakkhabhūtāti guṇā viya sāpi sacchikatā eva nāma hoti, na paresaṃ, vohāramattenāti adhippāyo. Yaṃguṇanemittikanti yehi guṇehi nimittabhūtehi etaṃ nāmaṃ nemittikañca jātaṃ. Vadantīti dhammasenāpatissa garubhāvato bahuvacanenāha, saṅgītikārehi vā katamanuvādaṃ sandhāya.
因为拥有自在等种种的“bhaga”,所以称为“bhagī”。以戒行修习道果等圣功德,以及林野等远离之地者,称为“bhajī”。他又是衣钵等资具的利益、以及戒等功德的分享者、继承者,这是其含义。以分别说、详说等方式将法宝分别开示者,称为“分别说者”(vibhattavā)。已破坏贪等恶法者,称为“bhagavā”——此义在各处皆有相应的关联。因为在世间被尊为“bhagavā”,所以称为“尊贵者”(garu);因为尊贵,所以也称为“bhagavā”,这是其含义。拥有那些被称为“bhagya”(福德)的波罗蜜者,称为“bhagyavā”。以多种方式——即通过身修习等种种修习次第——而善修习者,称为“善修习自性者”(subhāvitattano),这是一个反身代词,意思是善修习本性者。已到达诸有之尽头——涅槃者,称为“bhavantago”。各处“bhagavā”一词的构词成就,应依词源学的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Issariyādibhedo bhago assa atthīti bhagī. Maggaphalādiariyaguṇaṃ araññādivivekaṭṭhānañca bhaji sevi sīlenāti bhajī. Cīvarādipaccayānaṃ attharasādīnañca sīlādiguṇānañca bhāgī, dāyādoti attho. Vibhaji uddesaniddesādippakārehi dhammaratanaṃ pavibhajīti vibhattavā. Rāgādipāpadhammaṃ bhaggaṃ akāsīti bhagavāti vuccatīti sabbattha sambandho. Garupi loke bhagavāti vuccatīti āha ‘‘garū’’ti, yasmā garu, tasmāpi bhagavāti attho. Pāramitāsaṅkhātaṃ bhagyamassa atthīti bhagyavā. Bahūhi ñāyehīti kāyabhāvanādikehi anekehi bhāvanākkamehi. Subhāvitattanoti paccatte etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, tena subhāvitasabhāvoti attho. Bhavānaṃ antaṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti bhavantago. Tattha tattha bhagavāti saddasiddhi niruttinayeneva veditabbā.
现在,为了将“bhagī bhajī”等释义偈中以九词所示之义,与“bhagyavā”等偈中以六词所摄之义,连同词形成立、释义结合的方法差别一并显示,故说“然而这是另一种方法”等。其中,“音变”(vaṇṇavipariyaya)一词中的“iti”表“等”义,因此它包含了音变、音删、与词根义结合这三种。所谓“依音韵方法”(saddanayena),即依音韵规则而说。因“pisodara”等词属于不规则类,故说“取pisodara等插入规则”。插入本身就是一种规则,因为被收入该类即为插入。“bhagya”意为善巧。显示巴利原文
Idāni bhagī bhajīti niddesagāthāya navahi padehi dassitamatthaṃ bhagyavāti gāthāya chahi padehi saṅgahetvā padasiddhiṃ atthayojanānayabhedehi saddhiṃ dassetuṃ ayaṃ pana aparo nayotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vaṇṇavipariyayoti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, teneva vaṇṇavikāro vaṇṇalopo dhātuatthena niyojanañcāti imaṃ tividhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saddanayenāti saddalakkhaṇanayena. Pisodarādīnaṃ saddānaṃ ākatigaṇabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Pakkhipanameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Tappariyāpannatākaraṇañhi pakkhipanaṃ. Bhagyanti kusalaṃ.
贪等四法中,瞋是作为单一项而取的。无惭等则是作为一对而取的。依“他骂我……”(法句经3-4)等而反复发怒,这种心的缠缚即是愤恨。抹杀他人先前所行功德之相,名为覆。与多闻者等一争高下,将自己等同视之,名为争强。掩盖自身存在的过失,名为谄。彰显自身所无的功德,名为恶欲。于应尊敬处亦僵硬不柔,名为骄。以超越他人为相,名为狂。依出身等而高举为相,名为慢。极端高举为相,名为过慢。依出身等而沉醉的状态,即是慢,亦名为沉醉。此有二十七种。于诸欲中放逸其心,名为懈怠。身恶行等,是三种不善行。依渴爱与邪见的不善行,是三种杂染。贪、瞋、痴即是垢。它们及身恶行等,是三种违逆。欲想、害想、瞋想,名为三想。它们也就是寻。渴爱、邪见、慢,即是戏论。净、乐、常、我的颠倒,是四种颠倒。欲等是邪行。于衣等资具的贪著,是四渴爱之取。对佛、法、僧、学处的疑,及对同梵行者的愤恼,是五种心秽。于欲、身、色未离贪者,饱食后耽著睡眠等乐,及为求生某天众而修梵行,是五种心缚。于色的欢喜等,是五种欢喜。瞋、覆、嫉、恶欲、邪欲、见取,是六诤根。色渴爱等,是六渴爱身。邪见等,是八道支的对立面——显示巴利原文
Lobhādayo cattāro dosā ekakavasena gahitā. Ahirikādayo dukavasena. Akkocchimantiādinā (dha. pa. 3-4) punappunaṃ kujjhanavasena cittapariyonandhano kodhova upanāho. Paresaṃ pubbakāritālakkhaṇassa guṇassa nipuñchano makkho nāma. Bahussutādīhi saddhiṃ yugaggāho attano samakaraṇaṃ palāso. Attano vijjamānadosapaṭicchādanā māyā. Avijjamānaguṇappakāsanaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Garūsupi thaddhatā anonatatā thambho. Taduttarikaraṇalakkhaṇo sārambho. Jātiādiṃ nissāya unnatilakkhaṇo māno. Abbhunnatilakkhaṇo atimāno. Jātiādiṃ nissāya majjanākārappatto mānova mado nāma. So sattavīsatividho. Kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggo pamādo. Kāyaduccaritādīni tividhaduccaritāni. Taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritavasena tividhasaṃkilesā. Rāgadosamohāva malāni. Teyeva kāyaduccaritādayo ca tividhavisamāni. Kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāsaññā tividhasaññā nāma. Teyeva vitakkā. Taṇhādiṭṭhimānā papañcā. Subhasukhaniccaattavipariyesā catubbidhavipariyesā. Chandādayo agati. Cīvarādīsu paccayesu lobhā cattāro taṇhupādā. Buddhadhammasaṅghasikkhāsu kaṅkhā, sabrahmacārīsu kopo ca pañca cetokhīlā. Kāme kāye rūpe ca avītarāgatā, yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhādianuyogo, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyacaraṇañca pañca cetovinibandhā. Rūpābhinandanādayo pañca abhinandanā. Kodhamakkhaissāsāṭheyyapāpicchatāsandiṭṭhiparāmāsā cha vivādamūlāni. Rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā. Micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭhamaggaṅgapaṭipakkhā micchattā. Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, taṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, taṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, taṃ paṭicca pariggaho, taṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, taṃ paṭicca ārakkhā, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānādianekākusalarāsīti nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā. Pāṇātipātādayo dasa akusalakammapathā. Cattāro sassatavādā tathā ekaccasassatavādā antānantikā amarāvikkhepikā dve adhiccasamuppannikā soḷasa saññīvādā aṭṭha asaññīvādā aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā satta ucchedavādā pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti etāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Rūpataṇhādichataṇhā eva paccekaṃ kāmataṇhābhavataṇhāvibhavataṇhāvasena aṭṭhārasa honti, tā ajjhattabahiddharūpādīsu pavattivasena chattiṃsa, puna kālattayavasena aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni honti. Pabheda-saddaṃ paccekaṃ sambandhitvā lobhappabhedotiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Sabbadarathapariḷāhakilesasatasahassānīti sabbāni sattānaṃ darathasaṅkhātapariḷāhakarāni kilesānaṃ anekāni satasahassāni, ārammaṇādivibhāgato pavattiākāravibhāgato ca nesaṃ evaṃ pabhedo veditabbo. Pañca māre abhañjīti sambandho. Parissayānanti upaddavānaṃ.
如此,“bhagyavā与bhaggavā”二词之义既已分别,今为显示由此二词所摄之义,故说“以其有bhagyavantā故”等。其中,“具足百福相之特征者”,即具足由数百种福所生大士相的世尊。于心自在,名为于自心得自在,即于不净等而作不净想等的转起,及由心定,令自心达于自在。“小、轻”等中,以“等”字包含大、到达、极至、威势、如意、至终。其中,令身微小为小;以足行虚空等阿罗汉德而轻快,为轻;令身巨大为大;到达所喜之处,为到达;以决意等令愿成就,为极至;于己得自在,为威势;于神变自在,为如意;于虚空而行或作他事等,于一切处达于究竟,为至终,也说“如见童子形等”。“一切肢分的光辉”,即一切肢分的庄严。随顺即是“成就”。易成办者是彼时之愿,难成办者是久时所求的菩提等。破其“有”故,为bhagavā,这是依词源门而成就的。其余一切,也应知是依词源门而成就的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagyavā bhaggavāti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vibhajitvā idāni tehi dvīhi gahitamatthaṃ dassetuṃ bhagyavantatāya cassātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha satapuññajalakkhaṇadharassāti anekasatapuññanibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇadharassa bhagavato. Sakacitte issariyaṃ nāma paṭikkūlādīsu appaṭikkūlasaññitādivasappavattiyā ceva cetosamādhivasena ca attano cittassa vasībhāvāpādanameva. Aṇimā laghimādikanti ādi-saddena mahimā patti pākammaṃ īsitā vasitā yatthakāmāvasāyitāti ime chapi saṅgahitā. Tattha kāyassa aṇubhāvakaraṇaṃ aṇimā. Ākāse padasā gamanādiarahabhāvena lahubhāvo laghimā. Kāyassa mahantatāpādanaṃ mahimā. Iṭṭhadesassa pāpuṇanaṃ patti. Adhiṭṭhānādivasena icchitatthanipphādanaṃ pākammaṃ. Sayaṃvasitā issarabhāvo īsitā. Iddhividhe vasībhāvo vasitā. Ākāsena vā gacchato, aññaṃ vā kiñci karoto yattha katthaci vosānappatti yatthakāmāvasāyitā, ‘‘kumārakarūpādidassana’’ntipi vadanti. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirīti sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sobhā. Atthīti anuvattati. Lahusādhanaṃ taṃ taṃ kālikaṃ icchitaṃ, garusādhanaṃ cirakālikaṃ buddhattādipatthitaṃ . Bhagā assa santīti bhagavāti idaṃ saddasatthanayena siddhaṃ, sesaṃ sabbaṃ niruttinayena siddhanti veditabbaṃ.
于“压迫义、有为义、烧恼义、变坏义”等中,应将“义”字分别结合,称为“压迫义”“有为义”等。其中,依自性而以压迫为相者即是苦,其“义”即压迫,故说“压迫义”,此即其自性。又因苦由彼集而生起(有为),故由见集而显明“有为义”。再者,由于道去除烦恼的烧恼而极为清凉,故由见道,依其相应而显明“烧恼义”。由见不变坏法的灭,故显明“变坏义”。如此,于同一自性法,依其自性及远离其他三谛,应作分别而说有四义。而集的自性是“堆积义”,由见苦而显明“因缘义”;由见离系的灭而显明“系缚义”;由见出离的道而显明“障碍义”。显示巴利原文
Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhenātiādīsu pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭhotiādinā attha-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha attano sabhāvena pīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhaṃ. Tassa yo pīḷanameva attho ‘‘pīḷanaṭṭho’’ti vuccati, so sabhāvo. Yasmā pana taṃsamudayena saṅkhataṃ, tasmā saṅkhataṭṭho samudayadassanena āvibhūto. Yasmā ca maggo kilesasantāpaharattā susītalo, tasmāssa maggadassanena santāpaṭṭho āvibhūto tappaṭiyogattā. Avipariṇāmadhammassa pana nirodhassa dassanena vipariṇāmaṭṭho āvibhūtoti. Ekasseva sabhāvadhammassa sakabhāvato itarasaccattayanivattito ca parikappetabbattā cattāro atthā vuttā. Samudayassa pana rāsikaraṇato āyūhanaṭṭho sabhāvo, tasseva dukkhadassanena nidānaṭṭho āvibhūto. Visaṃyogabhūtassa nirodhassa dassanena saṃyogaṭṭho. Niyyānabhūtassa maggassa dassanena palibodhaṭṭho āvibhūto.
灭的自性是“出离义”,由见集而显明“远离义”;由见有为的道而显明“无为义”,或由见属于所缘的死法之苦而显明“不死义”。道的自性是“出离义”,由见集而显明“此即是苦之因”的“因义”——为证涅槃故,此即是因,故为“因义”;由见极微细的灭而显明“即于此见”的“见义”;由见增上的苦而显明“增上义”。以上即解释了压迫等十六行相。显示巴利原文
Nirodhassa pana nissaraṇaṭṭho sabhāvo, tasseva samudayadassanena vivekaṭṭho āvibhūto. Saṅkhatassa maggassa dassanena asaṅkhataṭṭho, visayabhūtassa maraṇadhammassa vā dukkhassa dassanena amataṭṭho. Maggassa pana niyyānaṭṭho sabhāvo, tasseva samudayadassanena dukkhassevāyaṃ hetu, nibbānappattiyā pana ayameva hetūti hetvaṭṭho, atisukhumanirodhadassanena idhameva dassananti dassanaṭṭho, adhikapaṇassa dukkhassa dassanena adhipateyyaṭṭho āvibhūto. Ete eva ca pīḷanādayo soḷasa ākārāti vuccanti.
远离诸欲,即离欲,名为身离。远离盖等而得的八等至,名为心离。所谓“执取”,是指于此执取各自果报之处,即说为五欲功德的欲蕴、烦恼及行作。远离这四者的涅槃,即称为离执取。显示巴利原文
Kāmehi vivekaṭṭhakāyatā kāyaviveko. Nīvaraṇādīhi vivittā aṭṭha samāpattiyo cittaviveko. Upadhīyanti ettha yathāsakaṃ phalānīti upadhayo, pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhātakāmakhandhakilesaabhisaṅkhārā, tehi catūhi vivittaṃ nibbānaṃ upadhiviveko nāma.
由无我随观所证得的圣道,以及由苦随观与无常随观所证得的圣道,依其来源,次第获得空解脱、无愿解脱、无相解脱之名。因为此解脱是从烦恼中解脱出来的缘故,所以称为‘解脱’。显示巴利原文
Anattānupassanāya paṭiladdho dukkhāniccānupassanāhi ca paṭiladdho ariyamaggo āgamanavasena yathākkamaṃ suññataappaṇihitaanimittavimokkhasaññaṃ paṭilabhati, kilesehi vimuttattā hi esa vimokkhoti.
犹如世间从各个词中取出各个音节而说‘腰带’(mekhalā)一般,此处也是如此,这是它的含义。‘Mehanassa’是指隐秘处。‘Khassa’是指空间。显示巴利原文
Yathā loke ekekapadato ekekamakkharaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mekhalā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpīti attho. Mehanassāti guyhappadesassa. Khassāti okāsassa.
在‘与天一起’等词中,‘与天一起存在’即是有天世间。应当了知,它与‘那个有天世间’等相连接。‘以有天一词’是指以作为‘有天’一词的修饰语而存在的‘天’一词。由于它也包含在‘有天’一词之内,故以部分代整体的借代方式而作称呼。若非如此,则由于只取天所殊胜的世间,便不会包含五欲界天,以上也是如此。以‘有魔’一词,通过‘魔’一词,也包含了所有与他共处的他化自在天,故说‘包含第六欲界天’。梵身天是指初禅地。以他们为首,直至无色界为止的诸梵天,对这些梵天的包含,即是包含梵身天等梵天。由于‘世间’一词也通于器世间等,故唯取有情世间特有的‘生类’而作包含,故说‘以生类一词包含有情世间’。以‘有天’等词包含了化生天,以‘有沙门’一词包含了净胜天,故说‘以有天有人一词,包含假名天及其余人’。其中,假名天是国王,其余人是假名天、沙门、婆罗门以外的人。由于有情世间特有的‘生类’一词被单独包含,故‘有天世间’中的‘世间’一词唯限定于器世间,故说‘以三词指器世间’。这也是依‘有天’等三词所表述的主要义而说的。但应知此处作器世间解。显示巴利原文
Sahadevehītiādīsu saha devehi vattatīti sadevako loko. Taṃ sadevakantiādinā yojanā veditabbā. Sadevakavacanenāti sadevaka-sadde visesanabhāvena ṭhitadevavacanena. Tassāpi sadevakapade antobhūtattā avayave samudāyopacāravasena vohāro kato. Itarathā tena devavisiṭṭhalokasseva gahaṇato pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ na siyā, evaṃ uparipi. Samārakavacanena mārasaddena tena sahacaritā sabbe vasavattidevā ca gahitāti āha ‘‘chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇa’’nti. Brahmakāyikā nāma paṭhamajjhānabhūmikā. Te ādi yesaṃ āruppapariyantānaṃ brahmānaṃ tesaṃ brahmānaṃ gahaṇaṃ brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ. Loka-saddassa okāsalokādīnampi sādhāraṇattā sattalokāveṇikameva pajāgahaṇaṃ katanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti. Sadevakādivacanena upapattidevānaṃ, sassamaṇavacanena visuddhidevānañca gahitattā āha ‘‘sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇa’’nti. Tattha sammutidevā rājāno, avasesamanussā sammutidevasamaṇabrāhmaṇehi avasiṭṭhā. Sattalokāveṇikassa pajāsaddassa visuṃ gahitattā sadevakaṃ lokanti ettha lokasaddaggahaṇaṃ okāsalokameva niyametīti āha ‘‘tīhi padehi okāsaloko’’ti. Idañca sadevakādipadattayavacanīyassa padhānatthassa vasena vuttaṃ. Okāsalokavisesanassa panettha devamārādisattalokassāpi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ sāmatthiyato gamyamānattā saputto āgatotiādīsu puttādīnaṃ viya. Imasmiñca naye sadevakaṃ samārakaṃ sabrahmakaṃ okāsalokaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ sadevamanussaṃ pajañcāti ca-kāraṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ, okāsasattalokānaṃ gahaṇena cettha tadubhayasammutinimittabhūto saṅkhāralokopi tadavinābhāvato gahito evāti daṭṭhabbo. Apare pana ‘‘sadevakantiādīhi pañcahi padehi sattalokova attano avayavabhūtadevādivisesanehi visesetvā gahito, taggahaṇena tadādhāro okāsaloko, tadubhayapaññattivisayo saṅkhāraloko ca gahitā eva hontī’’ti vadanti. Tesañca pajanti idaṃ lokasaddassa visesanaṃ katvā sadevakaṃ pajaṃ lokaṃ…pe… sadevamanussaṃ pajaṃ lokanti yojetabbaṃ.
因为其余诸界已由其馀词所包含,故无色界世间已被包含在内。以包含魔而言,即包含了以他为主的化生天及与其相似的天众,故说为“六欲界天世间”。在刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四大王天众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众这八众之中,四大王天等四众已由“有天”等词所包含,故此处以“有沙门、婆罗门”一词指沙门众与婆罗门众,以“有天、有人”一词指刹帝利众与居士众,因此说为“依四众而说”。“人世间已被包含”与此相关。其中,人世间即指人群,故又说“或其余一切有情世间”。显示巴利原文
Arūpāvacaraloko gahito pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi gahitattā. Māraggahaṇena tappadhānā taṃsadisā ca upapattidevā saṅgayhantīti āha ‘‘chakāmāvacaradevaloko’’ti. Khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu cātumahārājikādīnaṃ catunnaṃ parisānaṃ sadevakādipadehi saṅgahitattā idha sassamaṇabrāhmaṇinti iminā samaṇaparisā brāhmaṇaparisā ca, sadevamanussanti iminā khattiyaparisā gahapatiparisā ca vuttāti āha ‘‘catuparisavasenā’’ti. Tassa manussaloko gahitoti iminā sambandho. Tattha manussalokoti manussasamūho, tenāha ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti.
为显示另一种解释,他说:“或者,与假名天一起的人世间”。以“天”一词包含假名天,以“沙门、婆罗门、人”等词包含其余人。如是,在两种解释中,皆以“人”一词简别“生类”一词而成为“人生类”、“人类生类”,其后它又与天一同存在,故为“有天生类”。它既是“有天”的,又是“人”的,故为“有天、有人”,亦即那个“有天、有人的生类”。再者,为使其成为“有沙门、婆罗门”的,应如此构词:如同“生类”一词唯指人,若非如此,单指人便不成立,因为一切人已作为修饰语而尽摄,不存在任何作为其他词义的人。现在,为显示以“生类”一词也包含其余龙等有情,他说:“或其余一切有情世间”。在此也应连接为:依四众而说的其余一切有情世间,或者与假名天和人一同的其余一切有情世间。显示巴利原文
Vikappantaraṃ dassento āha ‘‘sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko’’ti. Devapadena sammutidevā, samaṇabrāhmaṇamanussapadehi sesamanussā ca gahitāti evaṃ vikappadvayepi manussaṃ pajaṃ manussiṃ pajanti pajā-saddaṃ manussa-saddena visesetvā taṃ puna saha devehi vattatīti sadevā, pajā. Sadevā ca sā manussā cāti sadevamanussā, taṃ sadevamanussaṃ pajaṃ. Puna kiṃ bhūtaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇinti evaṃ yathā pajāsaddena manussānaññeva gahaṇaṃ siyā, tathā nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ, itarathā manussānaññeva gahaṇaṃ na sampajjati sabbamanussānaṃ visesanabhāvena gahitattā aññapadatthabhūtassa kassaci manussassa abhāvā. Idāni pajanti iminā avasesanāgādisattepi saṅgahetvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti. Etthāpi catuparisavasena avasesasabbasattaloko sammutidevamanussehi vā saha avasesasabbasattalokoti yojetabbaṃ.
至此,已部分地包摄世间并显示了合说之理,现在为显示在以每一词无余地包摄一切世间的立场中,各各限定语同样有其效用,故说“而且在此”等文。“以最上为量”:即依对属于天趣中之最上者的限定、依了知的方式,“名声”这一词,透过作为其自身部分的“有天”一词,令听闻者心生了知而升起,应如此连结。“随顺次第”是指义与词的随顺次第,亦即了知的次第,这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni ekekapadena abhāgaso sabbalokānaṃ gahaṇapakkhepi tassa tassa visesanassa sapphalataṃ dassetuṃ api cetthātiādi vuttaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṭṭhānaṃ devagatipariyāpannānaṃ paricchinnavasena jānanavasena kittisaddo sayaṃ attano avayavabhūtena sadevakavacanena taṃ suṇantānaṃ sāvento abbhuggatoti yojanā. Anusandhikkamoti atthānañceva padānañca anusandhānakkamo, jānanakkamoti attho.
“Abhiññā”由删除ya字母而称为「abhiññāyā」。“普贤性”即一切部分皆善美。“教法”是开显行道与证道之教的教理法。由于佛陀的善觉性,此三句是就法的因、自性、果而说;同样,“依怙所生”等三句也是如此。中间两组三句应知唯就果而说。“事净”指听闻法后依所闻而行的人们,其称为善行道的事净。显示巴利原文
Abhiññāti ya-kāralopena niddesoti āha ‘‘abhiññāyā’’ti. Samantabhadrakattāti sabbabhāgehi sundarattā. Sāsanadhammoti paṭipattipaṭivedhasāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo. Buddhasubodhitatāyāti idaṃ tikaṃ dhammassa hetusarūpaphalavasena vuttaṃ, tathā nāthapabhavattikampi. Majjhe tikadvayaṃ phalavaseneva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Kiccasuddhiyāti dhammaṃ sutvā yathāsutavasena paṭipajjantānaṃ suppaṭipattisaṅkhātakiccasuddhiyā.
而今,世尊在宣说初善等行相的法时,便为听众开示了教梵行与道梵行。为显示开示此二者的「梵行」一词带有“有义”等词作为修饰,而非修饰“法”一词,并欲借此门径从多方面阐明其义,故说“有义、有文”等起始语。其中,三学及全部经教法称为教梵行。因为世尊说法时,如同开示戒等一样,也开示能说明它们的经教法,这是由于教理法具备声义总聚之故。“随宜”即如其所应。含摄三学的教梵行与道梵行,由于具足义利而成为义成就,且由于具足应次第证得的殊胜义利,故与义、与目的相应而行,所以唯是“有义”,而非“有文”。而称为经教法的教梵行,则依前述之义而“有义”且“有文”。即使吉罗多等蛮族语言也有义有文,但为简别殊胜的义与文结合,如说“有手、天授、有耳”等,故说“有义、有文”,并解释道:“由义成就而为有义,由文成就而为有文”。其中,听闻某义后如理而行能达一切苦尽,这样的成就名为义成就,即义具足之义。文成就,即具备松音、紧音等文句圆满的摩揭陀自性语,能将甚深义显了而示的能力,即文句具足之义。显示巴利原文
Idāni ādikalyāṇādippakārameva dhammaṃ desento bhagavā sotūnaṃ yaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, tappakāsakassa brahmacariyapadassa sātthantiādīni padāni visesanabhāvena vuttāni, na dhammapadassāti dassanamukhena nānappakārato atthaṃ vivaritukāmo sātthaṃ sabyañjananti evamādīsu panātiādimāha. Tattha tisso sikkhā sakalo ca tantidhammo sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ nāma. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento sīlādike viya tappakāsakaṃ tantidhammampi pakāseti eva saddatthasamudāyattā pariyattidhammassa. Yathānurūpanti yathārahaṃ. Sikkhattayasaṅgahitañhi sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca atthasampattiyā sampannatthatāya, uparūpari adhigantabbavisesasaṅkhātaatthasampattiyā ca saha atthena payojanena vattatīti sātthameva, na tu sabyañjanaṃ, tantidhammasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ yathāvuttena atthena sātthaṃ sabyañjanañca. Kirātādimilakkhavacanānampi sātthasabyañjanatte samānepi visiṭṭhatthabyañjanayogaṃ sandhāya sahattho devadatto savittotiādi viya ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjana’’nti. Tattha yaṃ atthaṃ sutvā tathā paṭipajjantā sabbadukkhakkhayaṃ pāpuṇanti, tassa tādisasampatti atthasampatti nāma, sampannatthatāti attho. Byañjanasampatti nāma sithiladhanitādibyañjanaparipuṇṇāya māgadhikāya sabhāvaniruttiyā gambhīrampi atthaṃ uttānaṃ katvā dassanasamatthatā sampannabyañjanatāti attho.
今依《指导论》的方法显示义理,故说「略示」等。其中,略说而令了知,故为「略示」,应从业成就的角度观其义,其余诸词亦然。初为「略说」,即开示。此二者是称为总说义语的广说之词。对已说一次者再说,为「开显」与「分别」。此二者是详说义语。对已开显者作更广的说明,及对已分别者以诸方式令知,为「显了」与「施设」。此二者是称为复详说义语的广说之词。由于与义句相应,即前述六词因教理中义之分析而为义句,与他们共俱,故为与义藏相应之义。未完结的词中,处于初、中的音为字母,单一字母或词亦为字母。带语尾的词为句。能显了句所诠之义者为文,即语句。对已说之义作多种分别,名为行相。对行相所诠者作词源解释,为词解。词解义的广说,为详释。或依“以字母略示,以句开示,以文开显,以行相分别,以词解显了,以详释施设”之说,则称为略示、开示的总说义能诠之语,名为字母与句;称为开显、分别的详说义能诠之语,名为文与行相;称为显了、施设的复详说义能诠之语,名为词解与详释。由这些成就,故为「有文」之义。显示巴利原文
Idāni nettippakaraṇanayenāpi (netti 4 dvādasapada) atthaṃ dassetuṃ saṅkāsanātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhepato kāsīyati dīpīyatīti saṅkāsananti kammasādhanavasena attho daṭṭhabbo, evaṃ sesesupi. Paṭhamaṃ kāsanaṃ pakāsanaṃ. Ubhayampetaṃ uddesatthavacanasaṅkhātassa vitthāravacanaṃ. Sakiṃ vuttassa puna vacanañca vivaraṇavibhajanāni. Ubhayampetaṃ niddesatthavacanaṃ. Vivaṭassa vitthāratarābhidhānaṃ vibhattassa ca pakārehi ñāpanaṃ uttānīkaraṇapaññattiyo. Ubhayampetaṃ paṭiniddesatthavacanasaṅkhātassa vitthāravacanaṃ. Atthapadasamāyogatoti yathāvuttāni eva cha padāni pariyattiyā atthavibhāgattā atthapadāni, tehi sahitatāya atthakoṭṭhāsayuttattāti attho. Apariyosite pade ādimajjhagatavaṇṇo akkharaṃ, ekakkharaṃ, padaṃ vā akkharaṃ. Vibhattiyantaṃ padaṃ. Padābhihitaṃ atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. Kathitassevatthassa anekavidhena vibhāgakaraṇaṃ ākāro nāma. Ākārābhihitassa nibbacanaṃ nirutti. Nibbacanatthavitthāro niddeso. Atha vā ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti, niddesehi paññapetī’’ti vacanato saṅkāsanapakāsanasaṅkhaātauddesatthavācakāni vacanāni akkharapadāni nāma. Vivaraṇavibhajanasaṅkhātaniddesatthavācakāni vacanāni byañjanākārā nāma. Uttānīkaraṇapaññattisaṅkhātapaṭiniddesatthavācakāni vacanāni niruttiniddesā nāma, tesaṃ sampattiyā sabyañjananti attho.
在“义甚深”等语中,“义”指名教之义,或因与果。“法”指名教,或因。“教说”指如法之说示。“证悟”指对前述义等的无颠倒通达。然而这些义等,犹如大海之于兔等,对钝智者而言,难以深入、无法立足,故说为甚深。其中,证悟亦依于义且与义同类,故说“由义甚深与证悟甚深而为有义”。法与教说虽亦依于义,然自身为文句之体,故说“由法甚深与教说甚深而为有文”。于前述义等中,各别之智为义无碍解等。其中,词解即择取名教之词而说,为词源解释之义。于三无碍解中之智,为辩无碍解。世间人唯依可信之言而于义生信,非依义之门,故说“由可信”等。“唯”字是“全体”的同义词,故说“由全体圆满之状态”。此处“梵行”一词,能表含摄三学的全体教法,故说“由摄持三学”等。显示巴利原文
Atthagambhīratātiādīsu attho nāma tantiattho, hetuphalaṃ vā. Dhammo nāma tanti, hetu vā. Desanā nāma yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpo. Paṭivedho nāma yathāvuttaatthādīnaṃ aviparītāvabodho. Te panete atthādayo yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tesu paṭivedhassāpi atthasannissitattā atthasabhāgattā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sāttha’’nti. Dhammadesanānaṃ atthasannissitattepi sayaṃ byañjanarūpattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjana’’nti. Yathāvuttaatthādīsu pabhedagatāni ñāṇāni atthapaṭisambhidādayo. Tattha niruttīti tantipadānaṃ niddhāretvā vacanaṃ, nibbacananti attho. Tīsu paṭisambhidāsu ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā. Lokiyā saddheyyavacanamukheneva atthesu pasīdanti, na atthamukhenāti āha saddheyyatotiādi. Kevalasaddo sakalādhivacananti āha ‘‘sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvenā’’ti. Brahmacariya-saddo idha sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ dīpetīti āha sikkhattayapariggahitattātiādi.
为了以另一种方式显示前述义理,故说“再者”等。其中,“有因缘的”意指带有说明地点、时间等的因缘叙述。“有事由的”意指具备事由等理由。此段经文的连接顺序为:他听说“韦兰若婆罗门听说:‘沙门……住’”,以及“那位乔达摩尊者的好名声如此传扬:‘他即是……宣说’”,以及“他开示……初善、中善、后善,开示时阐明具足义理、辞句等功德的梵行”,以及“见到那样的阿罗汉确实是善的”;听闻之后,韦兰若婆罗门便前往世尊那里。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttamevatthaṃ aparenāpi pariyāyena dassetuṃ api cātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sanidānanti desakālādidīpakena nidānavacanena sanidānaṃ. Sauppattikanti aṭṭhuppattiādiyuttiyuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷiyojanākkamo – ‘‘verañjo brāhmaṇo samaṇo khalu bho…pe… viharatī’’ti ca, ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ ‘itipi so…pe… pavedetī’ti evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato’’ti ca, ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, desento ca sātthasabyañjanādiguṇasaṃyuttaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti ca, ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti ca assosi, sutvā ca atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti.
在注释书中,虽然由于“见到那样的阿罗汉确实是善的”等经文被解释为婆罗门的内心思惟,从而“他阐明梵行”一句之后似乎应直接连接“他听说”一词,然而,因为“见到那样的阿罗汉确实是善的”是以“iti”一词限定、作为前述例示之义而说的,且在其他地方未见“iti”一词,又因为“那时韦兰若……”等显示了应做之事的差别,经文便转向了另一种方式,因此,按照前述方式,将“他听说”一词移至“见到那样的阿罗汉确实是善的”之后来连接,才是合理的。应这样理解:注释书作者为了显示婆罗门是基于自己的听闻而生起意欲,通过说明他前往的动机,而说了“心想‘仅仅见到也是善的’而生起意欲”等。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana kiñcāpi ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā atha kho verañjo…pe… upasaṅkamī’’ti evaṃ sādhu kho panātiādipāṭhassa brāhmaṇassa parivitakkanabhāvena vuttattā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti padānantarameva assosīti padaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ viya paññāyati, tathāpi ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ yathāvuttanidassanatthena iti-saddena paricchinditvā vuttattā pana aññattha iti-saddassa adassanato ca atha kho verañjotiādinā kattabbantaradassanamukhena pāḷiyā pakārantare pavattito ca yathāvuttavaseneva ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti vacanānantarameva assosīti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhanaṃ yuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathācariyena hi brāhmaṇassa attanā sutavaseneva ajjhāsayo uppajjatīti upasaṅkamanahetudassanamukhena dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvātiādi vuttanti gahetabbaṃ.
2 “如冷水与热水”这一说法,是按惯用顺序而说的。应理解为:由于婆罗门本性未得寂静,他如同热水,而世尊如同冷水;或者因为世尊具足智慧之火,故以热水为喻,而缺乏智慧的婆罗门则如同冷水。如此应知。“成为一体”是指通过问候的行为而达成一致的状态。“以何种……”等句中,以何种话语向婆罗门问候,那便是可问候的话语,如此连接。其中,“堪忍吗”指此身多苦,是否能堪忍。“能维持吗”指能否维持称为长久持续的活命。无病故少疾,无苦命故少恙。因能轻松无难地起身履行各种义务,故为“轻快起身”。“体力”是询问身体是否有胜任一切事务的体力。“安稳住”即安乐住。将“应忆念的”一词拉长而为“sāraṇīya”,故说“因可忆念故为sāraṇīya”。“以诸理由”即以诸原因。显示巴利原文
2.Sītodakaṃviya uṇhodakenāti idaṃ ukkamena mukhāruḷhavasena vuttaṃ, anupasantasabhāvatāya brāhmaṇasseva uṇhodakaṃ viya sītodakenāti attho gahetabbo, ñāṇatejayuttatāya vā bhagavā uṇhodakopamoti katvā tabbirahitaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ sītodakaṃ viya katvā tathā vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Ekībhāvanti sammodanakiriyāya ekarūpataṃ. Yāyātiādīsu yāya kathāya sammodi brāhmaṇo, taṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathanti yojanā. Tattha khamanīyanti dukkhabahulaṃ idaṃ sarīraṃ, kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Yāpanīyanti cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Rogābhāvena appābādhaṃ. Dukkhajīvitābhāvena appātaṅkaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇatthāya lahuṃ akicchena uṭṭhātuṃ yoggatāya lahuṭṭhānaṃ. Balanti sarīrassa sabbakiccakkhamaṃ balaṃ kacci atthīti pucchati. Phāsuvihāroti sukhavihāro. Saraṇīyameva dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘saritabbabhāvato ca sāraṇīya’’nti. Pariyāyehīti kāraṇehi.
“Bhāva”指行为,用于此义的中性词称为“bhāva中性词指示”,意为行为修饰词。“于一边”即在一端、适宜之处。“齿落等状态”指牙齿断落、头发花白等状态。“王统”指诸王的轮替,即次第。因出身于古老高贵家族而非因年迈而老,故说“于长久延续的家族传承中”。因拥有广大财富而称为“mahallaka”,故说“具足广大财富者”。“于所谓阐明本性的意义”中,指在称为阐明本性的意义里。“或不礼敬”指不认为应当礼敬,如此说明是不认知的性质。“色是常或无常”句中,指以色常为性质或以色无常为性质。“或无常”中的“或”字表示决定义。显示巴利原文
Bhāvoti kiriyā, tasmiṃ vattamāno napuṃsaka-saddo bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso nāma, kiriyāvisesanasaddoti attho. Ekamante ekasmiṃ ante yuttappadeseti attho. Khaṇḍiccādibhāvanti khaṇḍitadantapalitakesādibhāvaṃ. Rājaparivaṭṭeti rājūnaṃ parivattanaṃ, paṭipāṭiyoti attho. Purātanuccakulappasutatāya jiṇṇatā, na vayasāti āha ‘‘cirakālappavattakulanvaye’’ti. Vibhavānaṃ mahantattaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti mahallakoti āha ‘‘vibhavamahattatāya samannāgate’’ti. Vibhāvane nāma attheti pakativibhāvanasaṅkhāte atthe. Na abhivādeti vāti abhivādetabbanti na sallakkheti, evaṃ asallakkhaṇapakatikoti vuttaṃ hoti. Rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vāti etthāpi niccapakatikaṃ aniccapakatikaṃ vāti attho. Aniccaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo avadhāraṇattho.
“刚出生的”指片刻间出生,即出生后立即的意思。“以七步行走后……观察”中,应知如同“关门后出去”等说法,观察虽在行走之前所做,却被说成在行走之后所做。“观察”指当世界开显神变发生时,以肉眼观察。“最胜”即最殊胜。“尊敬”即供养。“无畏的”即最上的。显示巴利原文
Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto, jātasamanantaramevāti attho. Sattapadavītihārena gantvā…pe… olokesīti ettha dvāraṃ pidhāya nikkhantotiādīsu viya gamanato pure katampi olokanaṃ pacchā kataṃ viya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Olokesinti ca lokavivaraṇapāṭihāriye jāte maṃsacakkhunā volokesīti attho. Seṭṭhoti pasatthataro. Patimānesīti pūjesi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ.
3 “那话”指“我不对那婆罗门……”等语。“以证知而确立”指于阿拉汉果住立。“以出生”指以刹帝利等出生。“以往生”指于诸天中往生。“牵引”即拉拽。婆罗门认为世尊欠缺称为行礼等的温和可亲,故说“无味”;世尊为显示正是欠缺与之相反的色贪等之温和可亲才是“无味”,在说明“和蔼”一词于色味等中的用法时,说了“所缘……”等。显示巴利原文
3.Taṃ vacananti nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇātiādivacanaṃ. Aññāya saṇṭhaheyyāti arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya. Jātivasenāti khattiyādijātivasena. Upapattivasenāti devesu upapattivasena. Āviñchantīti ākaḍḍhanti. Yassa abhivādādikaraṇasaṅkhātassa sāmaggirasassa bhagavati abhāvaṃ maññamāno brāhmaṇo ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti āha, tabbidhurassa rūpataṇhādikasseva sāmaggirasassa abhāvena bhagavā ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti dassetuṃ sāmaggirasasaddassa rūparasādīsu vattanappakāraṃ dassento āha vatthārammaṇādītiādi.
“作多罗树基”:如同被断根的多罗树的基址,对于他们,作为色、味等所依的心相续已被作成那样的基址——就此义而言,省略中间词并作长音,以说明的方式表述,故说“如多罗树基”等。应视为修饰语后置,即“如多罗树基,那些已被作基者,称为作多罗树基者”,其义为“已被作成多罗树基者”。唯有被截顶的多罗树,因不能生叶、果等而称为“非基”,即“多罗树基”;如同那样,那些色、味等已被作成基者,称为“作多罗树基者”。这是依别词义而取义,依前说之理,容易了知。为显示特殊义,说“如被截顶的多罗树般已被作”。如此,即使在色、味等似顶的贪爱被断除时,作为彼基、似多罗树基的心相续,直至般涅槃处,仍会生起。然而,若依随文取义,以修饰语复合词的方式取义,则会导致色、味等与多罗树基相似的过失。在《心义灯》中,为避此过失,说色、味等有善、不善性,但这与“他们已被如来断除”等经文,以及与“称为欲乐味著的色、味等”等注释并不相符;因为即使漏尽者,直至般涅槃,善、不善的果报仍会生起,所以他们与“被截顶的多罗树”相似也不合理,应如此把握。或者,不考虑被截顶显示巴利原文
Tālāvatthukatāti ucchinnamūlānaṃ tālānaṃ vatthu viya nesaṃ rūparasādīnaṃ vatthu cittasantānaṃ katanti imasmiṃ atthe majjhepadalopaṃ dīghañca katvā niddesoti āha tālavatthu viyātiādi. Tālavatthu viya yesaṃ vatthu kataṃ te tālāvatthukatāti visesanassa paranipāto daṭṭhabbo, katatālavatthukāti attho. Matthakacchinnatāloyeva pattaphalādīnaṃ akāraṇatāya avatthūti tālāvatthu, taṃ viya yesaṃ vatthu kataṃ te rūparasādayo tālāvatthukatā, ayaṃ aññapadatthavasena atthaggāho heṭṭhā vuttanayena sugamoti visesamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘matthakacchinnatālo viya katā’’ti. Evañca matthakasadisesu rūparasādīsu rāgesu chinnesupi tabbatthubhūtassa tālāvatthusadisassa cittasantānassa yāva parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ upapannameva hoti. Yathārutato pana visesanasamāsavasena atthe gayhamāne rūparasādīnaṃ tālāvatthusadisatāya ṭhānaṃ āpajjati. Yaṃ pana sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.3) etaṃ dosaṃ pariharituṃ rūparasādīnaṃ kusalākusalattaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ te tathāgatassa pahīnātiādipāḷiyā, kāmasukhassādasaṅkhātā rūparasātiādiaṭṭhakathāya ca na sameti, khīṇāsavānampi yāva parinibbānā kusalākusalānaṃ phaluppattito tesaṃ matthakacchinnatālasadisatāpi na yuttāti gahetabbaṃ. Atha vā matthakacchinnatālassa ṭhitaṃ aṭṭhitañca amanasikatvā puna anuppattidhammatāsadisamattaṃ upametvā tālāvatthu viya katāti visesanasamāsavasena atthaggahaṇepi na koci doso. Anu-saddo pacchāti atthe vattatīti āha pacchābhāvo na hotītiādi. Anu abhāvaṃ gatāti pacchā anuppattidhammatāvasena abhāvaṃ gatā. Anacchariyāti anu anu uparūpari vimhayakatāti attho. Yañca kho tvaṃ vadesīti yaṃ vandanādisāmaggīrasābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ arasarūpatāya vadesi, taṃ kāraṇaṃ na vijjatīti attho.
4 “依所指而说之义”:婆罗门说“无受用者乔达摩尊者”等语时所指向的意义,以及世尊在自身认可无受用性等时所指向的意义,即是“依所指而说之义”。显示巴利原文
4.Sandhāya bhāsitamatthanti yaṃ atthaṃ sandhāya brāhmaṇo nibbhogo bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha, bhagavā ca yaṃ sandhāya nibbhogatādiṃ attani anujānāti, taṃ sandhāya bhāsitamatthaṃ.
5 “家族惯行所作”:即家族传统所作。从身、从身门生起的恶行,名为身恶行。“种种”即多种类别。显示巴利原文
5.Kulasamudācārakammanti kulācārakammaṃ. Kāyato kāyadvārato pavattaṃ duccaritaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Anekavihitāti anekappakārā.
6 “五欲分贪”:于色等五种欲分中,因极度执著而系缚的欲贪。以此显示,阿那含对于物品、装饰等的结缚欲贪,其欲贪性已不存在,因为此类贪已摄入色贪等中。“其余者”:此处指有身见与疑由第一道断除,其余诸结则由四道断除,故说“随宜”。显示巴利原文
6.Pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassāti rūpādīsu pañcasu kāmakoṭṭhāsesu ativiya saṅgavasena niyuttassa kāmarāgassa, etena anāgāmīnaṃ vatthābharaṇādīsu saṅganikantivasena uppajjanakāmarāgassa kāmarāgatābhāvaṃ dasseti tassa rūparāgādīsu saṅgahato. Avasesānanti ettha sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchānaṃ paṭhamena maggena, sesānaṃ catūhipi ucchedaṃ vadati, tenāha ‘‘yathānurūpa’’nti.
7 “他厌恶、他思量”:即如同厌恶,或我觉知为“他厌恶”。“以不善巧所生之义”:即以无明所生之义。显示巴利原文
7.Jigucchati maññeti jigucchati viya, ‘‘jigucchatī’’ti vā sallakkhemi. Akosallasambhūtaṭṭhenāti aññāṇasambhūtaṭṭhena.
8-10 “其中”:即如前所述两种义释之中。“结生”在此也是“胎”的异名,故说“为得天界结生”。“不再有之有”:即诸法于每一刹那中生起之产生。显示巴利原文
8-10.Tatrāti yathāvuttesu dvīsu atthavikappesu. Paṭisandhipariyāyopi idha gabbhasaddoti āha ‘‘devalokapaṭisandhipaṭilābhāyā’’ti. Apunabbhavabhūtāti khaṇe khaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinibbatti.
11 “法界”:即一切知智。因为它对诸法如实地持受与了别,故称“法界”。“达说法妙好”:即说法妙好——指能随所好而转起、善巧说法的能力,已达此者。“悲心遍满”:即以大悲遍满一切众生。为以譬喻显示此功德相,而说“如地平等心”。由此,因无瞋的本性,故为不动法性。“随生”:即随生而被结缚。“随老所驱”:即被老所缠缚。“成轮回桩”:因无法从轮回中拔出,以不动之性住立于轮回,犹如桩柱。“于已生之有情,因恒常面临死亡,故有怖畏”,故说“今日死”等。“无与伦比的先已生之状态”:即无与伦比的、在圣生中最初已生的状态,义为一切中最为殊胜。显示巴利原文
11.Dhammadhātunti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tañhi dhamme yāthāvato dhāreti upadhāretīti ‘‘dhammadhātū’’ti vuccati. Desanāvilāsappattoti abhirucivasena parivattetvā desetuṃ samatthatā desanāvilāso, taṃ patto. Karuṇāvipphāranti sabbasattesu mahākaruṇāya pharaṇaṃ. Tādiguṇalakkhaṇameva upamāya vibhāvento āha ‘‘pathavīsamacittata’’nti. Tatoyeva akujjhanasabhāvato akuppadhammatā. Jātiyā anugatanti jātiyā anubaddhaṃ. Jarāya anusaṭanti jarāya paliveṭhitaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇubhūtanti vaṭṭato uddharituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya vaṭṭe niccalabhāvena ṭhitaṃ khāṇu viya bhūtaṃ. Jātānaṃ maccānaṃ niccaṃ maraṇato bhayanti āha ajja maritvātiādi. Appaṭisamaṃ purejātabhāvanti asadisaṃ ariyāya jātiyā paṭhamajātabhāvaṃ, sabbajeṭṭhabhāvanti attho.
不说“Api”而说“Pi”,这显示“Pi”是一个独立的不变词。“正安卧”:即不用足等造成伤害,正确地卧于其上。虽然“卧”这一词根是不及物的,但由于加上了前缀“adhi”,应视为及物动词。“爪尖”:即爪之端。鸟的翅膀如同手足之位,故说“手足蜷缩”。“此处”:即于光明之处。“正出者”:即在正出者之中,这是表示简别的属格。“卵壳”:即卵之壳。显示巴利原文
‘‘Apī’’ti avatvā ‘‘pī’’ti vadanto pi-saddo visuṃ atthi nipātoti dasseti. Sammā adhisayitānīti pādādīhi upaghātaṃ akarontiyā sammadeva upari sayitāni, akammakassāpi sayatidhātuno adhipubbatāya sakammakatā daṭṭhabbā. Nakhasikhāti nakhaggāni. Sakuṇānaṃ pakkhā hatthapādaṭṭhāniyāti āha ‘‘saṅkuṭitahatthapādā’’ti. Etthāti ālokaṭṭhāne. Nikkhamantānanti nikkhamantesu, niddhāraṇe hetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Aṇḍakosanti aṇḍakapālaṃ.
世间即是众生共住之处。“于此觉悟”:因此树被称为菩提;自己觉悟,或依彼而觉悟,所以道与一切知智也称为菩提。“被觉悟”:因此涅槃称为菩提。“及中间菩提”:此为第二例,即使未出现“树”字,也是为了显示“菩提”一词可用于树。“胜广慧”:即如大地般广博之慧,这便是其义。“三明”:指阿罗汉道中与自身俱起的正见,即漏尽智,以及其余二种广大的明,因为它们是通过破除其所系烦恼而生起,故称“三明”。“六通”:此处道理相同。“声闻波罗蜜智”:即上首弟子所应证得的一切世间与出世间智。“独觉菩提智”:此处道理亦同。显示巴利原文
Lokoyeva lokasannivāso. Abujjhi etthāti rukkho bodhi, sayaṃ bujjhati, bujjhanti vā tenāti maggopi sabbaññutaññāṇampi bodhi. Bujjhīyatīti nibbānaṃ bodhi. Antarā ca bodhinti dutiyamudāharaṇaṃ vināpi rukkha-saddena bodhi-saddassa rukkhappavattidassanatthaṃ. Varabhūrimedhasoti mahāpathavī viya patthaṭapaññoti attho. Tisso vijjāti arahattamaggo attanā saha vattamānaṃ sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇañceva itarā dve mahaggatavijjā ca tabbinibandhakakilesaviddhaṃsanavasena uppādanato ‘‘tisso vijjā’’ti vuccati. Cha abhiññāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sāvakapāramīñāṇanti aggasāvakehi paṭilabhitabbaṃ sabbameva lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Paccekabodhiñāṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo.
“譬喻的相应说明”:即令譬喻的意义与所喻之事相应而作说明。“以义”:即以所喻之义。“锐利、迅疾、清净、勇健之相”:以此表示观智已达行舍智。“转变之时”:以此表示已至出起趣向。其时,它犹如怀有道智之胎,故说“入胎之时”。“次第证得”:指依初道等次第而证得。“具足四支”:即如所说“即使只剩下皮肤、筋骨,身体的血肉干枯……”,如是具足四支的精进。显示巴利原文
Opammasampaṭipādananti opammatthassa upameyyena samaṃ paṭipādanaṃ. Atthenāti upameyyatthena. Tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvoti iminā saṅkhārupekkhāpattataṃ vipassanāya dasseti. Pariṇāmakāloti iminā vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvāpattiṃ. Tadā ca sā maggañāṇagabbhaṃ dhārentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘gabbhaggahaṇakālo’’ti. Anupubbādhigatenāti paṭhamamaggādipaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena. Caturaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; a. ni. 2.5; mahāni. 196), sarīre upasussatu maṃsalohita’’nti evaṃ vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ.
于“欲贪”等中,以希求方式生起的微细贪,依“想要”之义而称为“欲”。较此更强者,依“染著”之义而称为“贪”。更强者则称“欲贪”。依相、随相及思惟之力而生起者,称为“思惟”。较此更强者,唯依强思惟之力而生起的贪,称为“思惟贪”。较此更强者,则称“思惟欲贪”。此种分别,是就同一贪的生起方式及阶段之差别而说。显示巴利原文
Chando kāmotiādīsu patthanākārena pavatto dubbalo lobho icchanaṭṭhena chando. Tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. Tatopi balavataro chandarāgo. Nimittānubyañjanasaṅkappavasena pavatto saṅkappo. Tatopi balavasaṅkappavaseneva pavatto rāgo. Tatopi balavataro saṅkapparāgo. Svāyaṃ pabhedo ekasseva lobhassa pavattiākārabhedena avatthābhedena ca vutto.
初禅论释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
“如彼”的意思是“那个是什么”。“此”是仅在前词中作限定,或者指“此所生之义”。“彼之出离”是指从那些欲中出离。“此”是强调词。“欲界”名为欲有,“出离”指初禅。“此”表决定。以彼分断、镇伏断、正断、安息断而出离的远离,称为彼分远离等。身远离、心远离、依远离为身远离等,在此禅论中唯有这三种,因为正断远离等不可能存在。“在解说中”指在大解说中。“就在那里”指在大解说中。“在分别中”指在禅分别中。“因为如此摄集时”指当两种欲都被摄集时。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti taṃ kathanti attho. Etanti pubbapadeyeva avadhāraṇakaraṇaṃ, etaṃ atthajātaṃ vā. Tannissaraṇatoti tesaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇattā. Esāti eva-kāro. Kāmadhātu nāma kāmabhavo, nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Esāti niyamo. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā tadaṅgavivekādayo. Kāyacittaupadhivivekā kāyavivekādayo, tayo eva idha jhānakathāya, samucchedavivekādīnaṃ asambhavā. Niddeseti mahāniddese. Tatthevāti mahāniddese eva. Vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge. Evañhi satīti ubhayesampi kāmānaṃ saṅgahe sati.
“以先前的”指以身远离。“在此”指在此身远离与心远离二者之中。“以第二的”指以心远离。“这些”指如前面所说方式,作为所缘欲与烦恼欲两种远离之能诠的“已离诸欲,已离不善法”这些词,此为属格,表简别。“愚痴状态的因之遍断”是承接而来的。因为不善法是愚痴状态的因。“温床的净化与培育”指温床的净化和增长。“在分别中只说了诸盖”是连接。在那里说了原因:“因为上面显示了禅支的对立与敌对状态”。在那里,上面以“有寻”等所说的禅支,显示了它们自己的对立面的敌对状态,这是它的意思。也有读作“因为上面显示了禅支的对立与敌对状态”。在那里,他们说“因为上面以直接对立的方式显示了所说禅支的敌对状态,所以在分别中只说了那些诸盖”这样的意思。“在Peṭaka中”指大迦旃延长老所作的随顺导论论法之作,而它因为是诸藏的注释,故称为“Peṭaka”,意思是在那里面。显示巴利原文
Purimenāti kāyavivekena. Etthāti etasmiṃ kāyacittavivekadvaye. Dutiyenāti cittavivekena. Etesanti yathāvuttanayena vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekadvayassa vācakabhūtānaṃ vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehīti imesaṃ padānaṃ, niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Bālabhāvassa hetupariccāgoti anuvattati. Akusaladhammo hi bālabhāvassa hetu. Āsayaposananti āsayassa visodhanaṃ vaḍḍhanañca. Vibhaṅge nīvaraṇāneva vuttānīti sambandho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘uparijhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato’’ti. Tattha upari savitakkantiādinā vuccamānāni jhānaṅgāni, tesaṃ attano paccanīkānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti attho. Uparijhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvassa dassanatotipi pāṭho. Tattha ‘‘upari vuccamānajhānaṅgānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkavasena paṭipakkhabhāvadassanato’’ti ‘‘nīvaraṇānaṃ tāneva vibhaṅge vuttānī’’tipi atthaṃ vadanti . Peṭaketi mahākaccāyanattherena kataṃ nettippakaraṇanayānusāripakaraṇaṃ, taṃ pana piṭakānaṃ vaṇṇanābhūtattā ‘‘peṭaka’’nti vuttaṃ, tasminti attho.
“寻”即对所缘的思量,故说为“思量”。对于以“色是色”等方式击触于境者,应知境之生起的击触是向上的击触。“将心引向所缘”指令心面向所缘。“随转”指随行,而那只是以那样的方式生起下一个刹那,因为在胜义上并无一物移动,于其他处同类情况也是如此。“随触”指遍触。“在那里”指在所缘上。以令俱生法履行各自作用的方式而令其随顺。在有些地方,指在无第二禅的有伺诸心中,所有地方都是如此。即使与伺俱生,寻也以在所缘上安立的方式转起,故说为“最初的安立”。“有震荡的”指因未寂静的本质而有冲力,因此于第二禅中成为所断支。“在初禅和第二禅中”是就五法禅而言的。为了显示没有脱离禅支的禅那,故说“如树”等。显示巴利原文
Vitakkanaṃ nāma ārammaṇaparikappananti āha ‘‘ūhana’’nti. Rūpaṃ rūpantiādinā visaye ākoṭentassa visayappavattiāhananaṃ upari āhanananti veditabbaṃ. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanaṃ nāma ārammaṇābhimukhakaraṇaṃ. Anusañcaraṇanti anuparibbhamanaṃ, tañca khaṇantarassa tathākārena uppādanameva, na hi paramatthato ekassa sañcaraṇamatthi, evamaññatthāpi īdisesu. Anumajjananti parimajjanaṃ. Tatthāti ārammaṇe. Sahajātānuyojanaṃ sakiccānuvattitākaraṇena. Katthacīti dutiyajjhānavirahitesu savicāracittesu sabbatthāti attho. Vicārena saha uppajjamānopi vitakko ārammaṇe abhiniropanākārena pavattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘paṭhamābhinipāto’’ti vutto. Vipphāravāti avūpasantasabhāvatāya vegavā, tenevesa dutiyajjhāne pahānaṅgaṃ jātaṃ. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesūti pañcakanayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṅgavinimuttassa jhānassa abhāvaṃ dassento rukkho viyātiādimāha.
就“远离”一词的“所作成就”义而言,说为“因此远离”;若就另一“处所”义而言,则说为“在那远离中”。“令喜悦”是令满足,或令增长。“遍满味”指以殊胜之相遍满全身。“乐相”即可爱自性,意为甘美。对相应诸法不加逼迫与漠视,而能随顺执持或作饶益,即是“随护”。“林”即林本身,“水”即水本身。于种种时中成为明显——由此说明:即使在获得可爱所缘等时,乐虽存在却不明显,唯喜于彼处明显;而在领受已得之味时,喜虽存在,乐却更加明显。于此应知,“领受已得之味”唯就心乐而言,非就身乐,因身乐不与喜相应,故在此处非所意指。而“此喜”等语,是显示“异词同义复合词”,或是就“有”的方面显示“后缀派生词”。依后一种解释,则随顺“异词同义复合词”而将“远离生喜乐”视为一词,并显示格位词尾并未消失。显示巴利原文
Viveka-saddassa bhāvasādhanapakkhe ‘‘tasmā vivekā’’ti vuttaṃ, itarapakkhe ‘‘tasmiṃ viveke’’ti. Pinayatīti tappeti, vaḍḍheti vā. Pharaṇarasāti paṇītarūpehi kāye byāpanarasā. Sātalakkhaṇanti iṭṭhasabhāvaṃ, madhuranti attho. Sampayuttānaṃ pīḷanajjhupekkhanaṃ akatvā anu anu gaṇhanaṃ upakāritā vā anuggaho. Vanameva vanantaṃ. Udakameva udakantaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvatoti iminā iṭṭhārammaṇādipaṭilābhasamayepi sukhaṃ vijjamānampi apākaṭaṃ, pītiyeva tattha pākaṭā, paṭiladdharasānubhavanasamaye ca vijjamānapītitopi sukhameva pākaṭataranti dasseti. Ettha ca cetasikasukhavaseneva paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ veditabbaṃ, na kāyikasukhavasena tassa pītisampayogasseva abhāvena idhānadhippetattā. Ayañca pītītiādi aññapadatthasamaāsadassanaṃ, assatthipakkhe taddhitapaccayadassanaṃ vā. Dutiyavikappena aññapadatthasamāsavaseneva ‘‘vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’nti idaṃ ekaṃ padanti dasseti, vibhattiyā ca alopaṃ.
“计数次第”是就说法顺序而说。“首先入定”是就初学者而言,然而对于已熟练自在的瑜伽行者,即使不依顺序,禅那亦能生起。“烧”即燃烧。如何能以无常等相为所缘的观,来审察以涅槃为所缘的道呢?由此故说“观”等。其中,“由道成就”指通过断除常等颠倒的道,与道相应,从无痴中自行成就对彼相的审察;或“由道”指由道的作用,即断除颠倒。显示巴利原文
Gaṇanānupubbatāti desanākkamaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ samāpajjatīti idaṃ ādikammikavasena vuttaṃ, ciṇṇavasīnaṃ pana yogīnaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyāpi jhānaṃ uppajjateva. Jhāpetīti dahati. Aniccādilakkhaṇavisayāya vipassanāya upanijjhāyanaṃ kathaṃ nibbānālambanassa maggassa hotīti āha vipassanāyātiādi. Tattha maggena sijjhatīti niccādivipallāsappahāyakena saha maggeneva taṃ lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ asammohato attano sijjhati. Atha vā maggenāti maggakiccena, vipallāsappahānenāti attho.
“其他”指有情。“因未说”是由于在禅那巴利圣典(《分别论》508等)中未说到“自心一境性”。“因已说”是由于在该禅那巴利圣典的《分别》中已经说到。显示巴利原文
Aññoti satto. Avuttattāti ‘‘sacittekaggata’’nti jhānapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 508 ādayo) avuttattā. Vuttattāti tassā jhānapāḷiyā vibhaṅge vuttattā.
第二禅那论释显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
“内”——因是禅那的修饰语,所以说明“此处意指自身之内”。因为禅那并非内在于六根,唯六根有其内性。“小波”即涟漪,“大波”即巨浪。“平息、寂止”等是相互通用的同义词,意指借由禅那之力而超越。“被导入”即被引至、被带入毁灭。“异门”指依禅那的资具而称为禅那,故非就胜义而言。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattanti jhānavisesanattā vuttaṃ ‘‘idha niyakajjhattamadhippeta’’nti. Jhānañhi ajjhattajjhattaṃ na hoti chaḷindriyānameva tabbhāvato. Khuddakā ūmiyo vīciyo. Mahatiyo taraṅgā. Santā honti samitātiādīni aññamaññavevacanāni, jhānabalena samatikkantāti adhippāyo. Appitāti gamitā vināsaṃ pāpitā. Pariyāyoti jhānaparikkhāre jhānavohārattā aparamatthato.
第三禅那论释显示巴利原文
Tatiyajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
“为证得彼”即为证得第三道。“从生起而观”即依与慧俱行的修习,如其平等运载的状态那样,如理而观。“广大”即达至广大状态。“有力”即因寻、伺、喜的消失而达到坚固状态,因此下文将说“因不被寻、伺、喜所征服”等。说明了舍的类别之后,为阐明此处所指的舍,而说“然而,此舍”等。其中,“于彼彼处正念而住之中性”即漏尽者在可爱或不可爱的六所缘现前时,以不舍离清净本性的方式保持中立,故称“六支舍”;因对众生生起中性行相,故称“梵住舍”;作为俱生法的中性行相,故称“觉支舍”;它本身就是“于彼彼处正念而住之中性舍”;与第三禅那俱行时,即使对最上之乐亦无偏袒,故称“禅那舍”;与第四禅那俱行时,因一切敌对法悉皆清净,故称“清净舍”。如是依其状态差别,说为六种。显示巴利原文
Tadadhigamāyāti tatiyamaggādhigamāya. Upapattito ikkhatīti paññāya sahacaraṇaparicayena yathā samavāhibhāvo hoti, evaṃ yuttito passati. Vipulāyāti mahaggatabhāvappattāya. Thāmagatāyāti vitakkavicārapītivigamena thirabhāvappattiyā, teneva vakkhati ‘‘vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā’’tiādi. (Pārā. aṭṭha. 1.11 tatiyajjhānakathā). Upekkhābhedaṃ dassetvā idhādhippetaṃ upekkhaṃ pakāsetuṃ upekkhā panātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tatramajjhattatāva khīṇāsavānaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārena ajjhupekkhanato ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā’’ti ca, sattesu majjhattākārappavattattā ‘‘brahmavihārupekkhā’’ti ca, sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā ‘‘bojjhaṅgupekkhā’’ti ca, kevalā ‘‘tatramajjhattupekkhā’’ti ca, tatiyajjhānasahagatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātabhūtā ‘‘jhānupekkhā’’ti ca, catutthajjhānasahagatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhitāya ‘‘pārisuddhupekkhā’’ti ca tena tena avatthābhedena chadhā vuttā.
然而,对于与精进俱生而未过度精勤、亦未过度松懈的诸行,以舍的模式转起,即说为“精进舍”。在证得八种色界与无色界禅那的前行阶段,便已处于断除盖障与寻伺等的状态,且在断除它们时,以无功用行、入于中庸的模式而转起——依定而生起的八种慧,以及在存续之取蕴诸行中,以观察模式转起、依观而生起的四种慧,还有为证得各各道果、在四道之前转起、依无愿解脱而转起的四种慧,以及依空解脱与无相解脱而转起的两种慧,此十种慧即名为“行舍”。如上所说的观慧,在观察诸相时亦处于中庸,即名为“观舍”。不苦不乐受即名为“受舍”。为说明“此十种舍,于各处所来之理的分别,应依《法集论注》所说之理而知”,故说“如是,此十种”等。“于各处所来之理”:如同地、人等词是显示其差别的基础,乃依独立的论母词而说,并非依地与人等来显示差别,因为其来处已于《清净道论》等中说明。因此,对于《精要明灯》中所说“为显明此十种舍依地与人等之差别,应依各处所说之理而知,故说‘如是,此十种’等”,不应执取该说,应知此为所述之义。“于各处所来之理”:例如“此处,漏尽比丘以眼见色已,不喜”显示巴利原文
Vīriyameva pana anaccāraddhaanatisithilesu sahajātesu saṅkhāresu upekkhanākārena pavattaṃ ‘‘vīriyupekkhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhannaṃ rūpārūpajjhānānaṃ paṭilābhato pubbabhāge eva nīvaraṇavitakkavicārādīnaṃ pahānābhimukhībhūtattā tesaṃ pahānepi abyāpārabhāvūpagamanena majjhattākārappavattā samādhivasena uppannā aṭṭha paññā ceva upādānakkhandhabhūtesu saṅkhāresu ajjhupekkhanākārappavattā vipassanāvasena uppannā catunnaṃ maggānaṃ pubbabhāge tassa tassa adhigamāya catasso catunnaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ pubbabhāge tassa tassa adhigamāya appaṇihitavimokkhavasena pavattā catasso suññataanimittavimokkhavasena dveti dasa paññā cāti ime aṭṭhārasa paññā saṅkhārupekkhā nāma. Yathāvuttavipassanāpaññāva lakkhaṇavicinanepi majjhattabhūtā vipassanupekkhā nāma. Adukkhamasukhavedanā vedanupekkhā nāma. Imāsaṃ pana dasannampi upekkhānaṃ ‘‘tattha tattha āgatanayato vibhāgo dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbo’’ti dassento āha evamayaṃ dasavidhāpītiādi. Tattha tattha āgatanayatoti idampi hi tāsaṃ vibhāgadassanassa bhūmipuggalādipadaṃ viya visuṃ mātikāpadavasena vuttaṃ, na pana bhūmipuggalādivasena vibhāgadassanassa āgataṭṭhānaparāmasanaṃ āgataṭṭhānassa aṭṭhasāliniyātiādinā vuttattā, tasmā sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.11 tatiyajjhānakathā) yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘imāsaṃ pana dasannampi upekkhānaṃ bhūmipuggalādivasena vibhāgo tattha tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti dassento āha evamayaṃ dasavidhātiādī’’ti, taṃ amanasikatvā vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Tattha tattha āgatanayatoti ‘‘idha (khīṇāsavo) bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti, na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 6.1) chaḷaṅgupekkhā āgatā, ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.308; ma. ni. 1.77; 2.309; 3.230) evaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā āgatāti iminā nayena dasannampi upekkhānaṃ tattha tattha vuttapadesesu āgatanayadassanato ca ayaṃ dasavidhāpi upekkhā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāti sambandho.
就地等而言,六支舍属欲界,梵住舍属色界等,这是依地而分;六支舍唯属无学,梵住舍属凡夫等三类人,这是依人而分;六支舍与悦俱、舍俱心相应等,这是依心而分;六支舍以六所缘为境等,这是依所缘而分;受舍为受蕴所摄,其余九舍为行蕴所摄,这是依蕴摄而分;六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、禅舍、遍净舍、中舍于义为一,故于同一刹那,若有其一,其余则不生起,行舍与观舍亦当如是知;受舍与精进舍可能于同一刹那生起,这是依一刹那而分;六支舍是无记,梵住舍是善与无记,其余亦然,而受舍亦可是不善,这是依善、不善、无记三性而分;略而言之,有四种法,即依精进、受、中庸与智,这是依略摄而分——此十种舍,亦当依《法集论注》所说之理而知,此为释义。显示巴利原文
Bhūmītiādīsu pana chaḷaṅgupekkhā kāmāvacarā, brahmavihārupekkhā rūpāvacarātiādinā bhūmito ca, chaḷaṅgupekkhā asekkhānameva, brahmavihārupekkhā puthujjanādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi puggalānantiādinā puggalato ca, chaḷaṅgupekkhā somanassupekkhāsahagatacittasampayuttātiādinā cittato ca, chaḷaṅgupekkhā chaḷārammaṇātiādinā ārammaṇato ca, ‘‘vedanupekkhā vedanākkhandhena saṅgahitā, itarā nava saṅkhārakkhandhenā’’ti khandhasaṅgahavasena ca, ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārabojjhaṅgajhāna pārisuddhitatramajjhattupekkhā ca atthato ekā. Tasmā ekakkhaṇe ca tāsu ekāya sati itarā na uppajjanti, tathā saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanupekkhāpi veditabbā. Vedanāvīriyupekkhānamekakkhaṇe siyā uppattī’’ti ekakkhaṇavasena ca, ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā abyākatā brahmavihārupekkhā kusalābyākatā, tathā sesā. Vedanupekkhā pana siyā akusalāpī’’ti evaṃ kusalattikavasena ca, ‘‘saṅkhepato cattāro ca dhammā vīriyavedanātatramajjhattatāñāṇavasenā’’ti evaṃ saṅkhepavasena ca ayaṃ dasavidhāpi upekkhā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāti yojanā.
于此,虽然在《清净道论》中依地与人等从自相状提取而未说,但依彼处所说之类,将他们依地与人等分别之理提取后是可以了知的,因此将彼处已说与未说之自相状合而为一,以“在各处所来之理”等九种方式作了附带说明,故不说“依《法集论注》所说之相状”,而说“所说之理”。确实,当说“漏尽比丘以眼见色”等时,六处舍依色等所缘故从地是欲界,从人唯是无学者,从心是悦俱与舍俱心相应,从所缘是六所缘,从三性是无记,智者能了知;又,当说六处舍、梵住舍、中舍、禅舍、遍净舍于义为一时,其被行蕴所摄故与梵住舍等同一刹那不生起等亦可了知;如六处舍一样,其余舍亦应如是依《清净道论》所说之理,了知地等分别的提取之理。“无努力之味”:即使于殊胜之乐亦不向彼倾斜,此是相反作用之义。显示巴利原文
Ettha cetā kiñcāpi aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ bhūmipuggalādivasena sarūpato uddharitvā na vuttā, tathāpi tattha vuttappakāreheva tāsaṃ bhūmipuggalādivibhāgo nayato uddharitvā sakkā ñātunti tattha sarūpato vuttañca avuttañca ekato saṅgahetvā tattha tattha āgatanayatotiādīhi navahi pakārehi atideso kato, teneva ‘‘dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttavasenā’’ti avatvā ‘‘vuttanayenevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathāhi khīṇāsavo bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti ādimhi vutte chaḷaṅgupekkhā rūpādiārammaṇatāya bhūmito kāmāvacarā ca puggalato asekkhānameva ca uppajjati, cittato somanassupekkhācittasampayuttā, ārammaṇato chaḷārammaṇā, kusalattikato abyākatā cāti paṇḍitehi sakkā ñātuṃ, tathā chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekātiādimhi vutte panassa saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitattā brahmavihārupekkhādīhi saha ekakkhaṇe anuppattiādayo ca sakkā ñātuṃ, yathā ca chaḷaṅgupekkhā, evaṃ sesānampi yathārahaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ vuttanayato bhūmiādivibhāguddhāranayo ñātabbo. Anābhogarasāti paṇītasukhepi tasmiṃ avanatipaṭipakkhakiccāti attho.
“以人”即以人为立足处。“守护”是对与烦恼相应者的守护。“度脱”是完成工作的超越。“考察”是寻伺。“此”是念与正知。由于“与彼名身俱行之乐”,以此故有此义等,此为结合。“彼”即具备禅那者。“以彼所生”即以如所说与名身俱行之乐为生起之因的色。“此”即瑜伽者。“于”即色身。“触”即被极殊胜之色所触。为了显示此义,即体验作为身乐之因的色所生起之名身乐时,在作禅那具备之因上,以作用之假说而说“以身触乐”,为了显示此义。“Yaṃ(以)”是于因义之不变词,故说“以禅那之因”。“达乐之极至”即达到乐的顶点极限。如是应知这些之断除,此为结合。那么,为何唯于禅那说灭?此为结合。显示巴利原文
Puggalenāti puggalādhiṭṭhānena. Kilesehi sampayuttānaṃ ārakkhā. Tīraṇaṃ kiccassa pāragamanaṃ. Pavicayo vīmaṃsā. Idanti satisampajaññaṃ. Yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhanti imassa tasmā etamatthantiādinā sambandho. Tassāti jhānasamaṅgino. Taṃsamuṭṭhānenāti taṃ yathāvuttanāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ yassa rūpassa tena taṃsamuṭṭhānena rūpena. Assāti yogino. Yassāti rūpakāyassa. Phuṭattāti atipaṇītena rūpena phuṭattā. Etamatthaṃ dassentoti kāyikasukhahetubhūtarūpasamuṭṭhāpakanāmakāyasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno eva jhānasamaṅgitākaraṇe kāriyopacārato ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti vuccatīti imamatthaṃ dassentoti attho. Yanti hetuatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘yaṃjhānahetū’’ti. Sukhapāramippatteti sukhassa ukkaṃsapariyantaṃ patte. Evametesaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Atha kasmā jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti sambandho.
第四禅论之解释显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānakathāvaṇṇanā
“Kattha cuppannanti”中,“katthā”是表原因的处格,意为“当何因缘存在时”。“Nānāvajjane”指:此近行定中,其转向(āvajjana)与安止速行中的转向相异、亦不同于之前速行中的转向,故而称为“nānāvajjana”(转向有异)。因不舒适的坐姿而生起的疲劳,称为“visamāsanupatāpo”(不舒适坐姿的恼害)。“Upacāre vāti”等是显示另一类观点,意为“即使在转向同一的近行定中”。“Pītipharaṇenāti”以此表明,即便于单一速行中,亦无如安止速行那般遍满欲界喜(pīti)的情形。应联系理解为“domanassindriyassa assa siyā uppatti”(忧根可能生起)。“Etanti”应联系理解为“domanassindriyaṃ uppajjati”(忧根生起)。“Vitakkavicārappaccayepīti”中的“pi”字用得不合位置,应将其连到前面所说的“pahīnassā”之后,方可会通。显示巴利原文
Kattha cuppannanti ettha katthāti hetumhi bhummaṃ, kasmiṃ hetumhi satīti attho. Nānāvajjaneti appanāvīthiāvajjanato nānā bhinnaṃ purimavīthīsu āvajjanaṃ yassa upacārassa, tasmiṃ nānāvajjane. Visamanisajjāya uppannakilamatho visamāsanupatāpo. Upacāre vātiādi pakkhantaradassanaṃ ekāvajjanūpacārepi vāti attho. Pītipharaṇenāti iminā appanāvīthiyā viya ekavīthiyampi kāmāvacarapītiyā pharaṇamattassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Domanassindriyassa assa siyā uppattīti sambandho. Etanti domanassindriyaṃ uppajjatīti sambandho. Vitakkavicārappaccayepīti pi-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto. So ‘‘pahīnassā’’ti heṭṭhā vuttapadānantaraṃ yojetabbo ‘‘pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassā’’ti. Vitakkavicārabhāveti ettha ‘‘uppajjati domanassindriya’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ, vitakkavicārabhāvahetūti attho. Vitakkavicārāti ettha iti-saddo tasmāti etasmiṃ atthe daṭṭhabbo, tena yasmā etaṃ domanassindriyaṃ vitakkavicārapaccaye…pe… neva uppajjati, yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāveyeva uppajjati. Yasmā ca appahīnāyeva dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārā, tasmā tatthassa siyā uppattīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
“Tatthā”指在第二禅的近行定中。“Assā”指忧根的。“Siyā uppattī”——这也只是通过显示其缘,而作可能性之说。因为对忧根生起的可能性,仅在近行刹那作此假设才合理;而在无寻伺的第二禅安止刹那,连生起的可能性都不应作假设。否则,在善心刹那中不可能生起不善的忧,便不应说“tatthassa siyā uppatti”(它在那里可能生起)。或者,此处的处格是“在附近”之意,指在近行定禅那之后的速行中。“Dutiyajjhāneti”此处意为,即使在(近行定)其后的速行中也绝不生起;同样,下文就乐根也是如此。应联系理解为“somanassindriyassa uppatti”(喜根的生起)。“Pahīnāti vuttā”这样说,是因为经中说“由断尽五下分结”。“Dukkhābhāvenāti”指由于没有苦性。“Evaṃ sukhābhāvenāti”此处也是如此。“Etenāti”指以此遮破苦与乐的说法。“Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanal...”显示巴利原文
Tatthāti dutiyajjhānūpacāre. Assāti domanassindriyassa. Siyā uppattīti idañca paccayamattadassanena sambhāvanamattato vuttaṃ. Domanassuppattisambhāvanāpi hi upacārakkhaṇeyeva kātuṃ yuttā, vitakkavicārarahite pana dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe taduppattisambhāvanāpi na yuttā kātunti. Itarathā kusalacittakkhaṇe akusaladomanassuppattiyā asambhavato ‘‘tatthassa siyā uppattī’’ti na vattabbaṃ siyā. Samīpatthe vā etaṃ bhummaṃ, upacārajjhānānantaravīthīsūti attho. Dutiyajjhāneti etthāpi anantaravīthīsupi na tveva uppajjatīti attho, evaṃ upari sukhindriyepi. Somanassindriyassa uppattīti sambandho. Pahīnāti vuttāti idaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’ti vuttattā vuttaṃ. Dukkhābhāvenāti dukkhatābhāvena. Evaṃ sukhābhāvenāti etthāpi. Etenāti dukkhasukhapaṭikkhepavacanena. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇāti atiiṭṭhaatianiṭṭhānaṃ viparītassa majjhattārammaṇassa anubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattārammaṇampi hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu eva paviṭṭhaṃ tabbinimuttassa abhāvā.
宿住随念论的解释。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsakathāvaṇṇanā
12 无色界禅那也因支的等同性而摄于第四禅中,故说“某些是神通的基础”等。正因如此,下文将说“成就八等至”等。在这些之中,只有第四禅是神通的基础和灭尽定的基础,其余禅那则不是。然而,从远因的角度,将它们也一起归为“四禅”而说,应如此理解。“心一境性之处”这是就现法乐住而说,故说“漏尽者”等。“成就一切事业”指成就天住等一切佛陀的事业。“给予一切世间出世间功德”以此总括了如前所说的为观基础等一切。应知此禅那因即是能给予一切佛功德的道智所依之处,故如此说。“Yathayidaṃ”意为“如同这个”。“Abhinīhārakkhamaṃ”指堪能导向彼(神通等)的,即适合导向神变等所缘。显示巴利原文
12. Arūpajjhānānampi aṅgasamatāya catutthajjhāne saṅgahoti āha kesañci abhiññāpādakānītiādi, teneva vakkhati ‘‘aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.12). Tesu ca catutthajjhānameva abhiññāpādakaṃ nirodhapādakaṃ hoti, na itarāni. Dūrakāraṇataṃ pana sandhāya ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti nesampi ekato gahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cittekaggatatthānīti idaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha khīṇāsavānantiādi. Sabbakiccasādhakanti dibbavihārādisabbabuddhakiccasādhakaṃ. Sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti iminā yathāvuttaṃ vipassanāpādakattādisabbaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Idañhi jhānaṃ bhagavato sabbabuddhaguṇadāyakassa maggañāṇassa padaṭṭhānattā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathayidanti yathā idaṃ. Abhinīhārakkhamanti iddhividhādiatthaṃ tadabhimukhaṃ nīharaṇayoggaṃ.
“Jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānanti”:意指以证得禅那为因、依止禅那而生起的(烦恼)。“Pāpakānanti”:意为低劣的。“Icchāvacarānanti”:是指依于欲求而行、沉溺其中,尚未达到盖的状态或与盖俱行,以自赞等方式现起的(烦恼),例如“啊,但愿导师只问我之后,再为比丘们开示这样的法”等方式所生起的慢等。然而,有些传本中也记载着“jhānappaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ”(证得禅那的敌对者)的读法,这应视为抄写时的疏忽所致,因为前文在“清净”一词处已说过:“由于证得禅那的敌对者——诸盖的不存在,故以盖的远离而清净。”《心义灯》中说:“‘Icchāvacarānanti’:指依欲求而行、沉溺于欲求所生的种种忿与不悦,此读法也不正确,应知。正因如此,《清净道论》中完全没有显示此读法。”此处应知,因执取“种种忿与不悦”已达盖的状态的过失,故该读法被否定。显示巴利原文
Jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānanti jhānappaṭilābhahetukānaṃ jhānappaṭilābhaṃ nissāya uppajjanakānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāya vasena otiṇṇānaṃ nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ tadekaṭṭhatañca appattānaṃ attukkaṃsanādivasappavattānaṃ aho vata mameva satthā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṃ evarūpaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyātiādinayappavattānaṃ mānādīnaṃ. Potthakesu pana ‘‘jhānappaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’’ntipi pāṭhaṃ likhanti, so pamādapāṭhoti gahetabbo ‘‘jhānappaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ abhāvassa nīvaraṇadūrībhāvena parisuddho’’ti evaṃ pubbe parisuddhapadeyeva vuttattā. Sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.12) pana ‘‘icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti atthoti ayampi pāṭho ayutto evāti gahetabbaṃ. Tato eva ca visuddhimagge ayaṃ pāṭho sabbena sabbaṃ na dassito’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ca nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti evaṃ nīvaraṇabhāvappattadosānaṃ parāmaṭṭhattā ayaṃ pāṭho paṭikkhittoti veditabbo.
“Abhijjhādīnanti”:在此,由于“得禅那的缘”一词是贯通下来的,因此以“贪欲”一词,也涵盖了那些本性并非盖的贪与慢等。“Ubhayampīti”:指无秽与离随烦恼这两者,应依次遵循《无秽经》与《事经》的教导来理解。在上述经中,虽然也说到了达到盖的粗重过失,但由于是依证得第四禅者而说,所以此处取的是微细的(烦恼)。此处只是依秽与随烦恼的共相来引证诸经。正因如此,才说“按经的教导”,而不是“依经本身”。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhādīnanti ettha abhijjhā-saddena ca anīvaraṇasabhāvasseva lobhassa mānādīnañca gahaṇaṃ jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānanti anuvattamānattā. Ubhayampīti anaṅgaṇattaṃ vigatūpakkilesattañcāti etaṃ ubhayampi yathākkamaṃ anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Tesu ca suttesu kiñcāpi nīvaraṇasabhāvappattā thūladosāpi vuttā, tathāpi adhigatacatautthajjhānassa vasena vuttattā idha sukhumā eva te gahitā. Aṅgaṇupakkilesasāmaññena panettha suttānaṃ apadisanaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘suttānusārenā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana suttavasenāti.
为了显示“宿住随念智”中“智”的词源,即“宿住随念智”,而说“在宿住随念中”等。现在,为了分别地显示宿住、宿住随念以及其中的智,而说“其中”等。“宿”一词涉及过去生,“住”一词是业作格,故说“在过去诸生中曾住过的诸蕴”。而此处的“曾住性”是指在自相续中曾转起,因此说“曾领受的”等。现在,为了显示“住”一词依自他相续的成就方式而有之义,在说了“曾住的诸法或曾住者”之后,为了展开说明,而说“以所行境为住”等。因为即使是作为所行境的诸法,也依智而被称为“曾住者”,而为了显示它们依自他识的所行境而有二种,故说“自己的”等。或者,“被他人识所了知的”也是“曾住者”,这是句子的连接。此处也应引入“被限定的”一词来连接。因为在无始的轮回中,那些自己未曾了知过的有情的诸蕴,只是被某些他人所了知,故被称为“被他人识所了知的”;对它们的随念比前者更难,因为那些被他人所了知而成为“被他人识所了知”者,是依那些他人的现在相续之流而可了知的。而且,那些“被他人识所了知者”有二种:已般涅槃者和未般涅槃者。其中,对已般涅槃者的随念极难,因为其相续已完全断尽。为了显示那种达到顶峰的、被他人所了知的宿住,而说“在对已断轮辐者等的随念中”。其中,“已断轮辐者”是指过去已般涅槃的漏尽者,因为他们已断除了轮回之道。以“等”字,也包含了依狮子跃入的方式对未般涅槃的、被他人识所了知者的随念。应引入“以那种念而随念宿住,那念就是宿住随念”来连接。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsānussatiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇanti nibbacanaṃ dassento āha pubbenivāsānussatimhītiādi. Idāni pubbenivāsaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiṃ tattha ñāṇañca vibhāgato dassetuṃ tatthātiādi vuttaṃ. Pubba-saddo atītabhavavisayo, nivāsa-saddo ca kammasādhanoti āha ‘‘pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthakkhandhā’’ti. Nivutthatā cettha sakasantāne pavattatā, tenāha anubhūtātiādi. Idāni saparasantānasādhanavasena nivāsa-saddassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nivutthadhammā vā nivutthā’’ti vatvā taṃ vivarituṃ gocaranivāsenātiādi vuttaṃ. Gocarabhūtāpi hi dhammā ñāṇena nivutthā nāma honti, te pana saparaviññāṇagocaratāya duvidhāti dassetuṃ attanotiādi vuttaṃ. Paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā nivutthāti sambandho. Idhāpi paricchinnāti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Anamataggepi hi saṃsāre attanā aviññātapubbānaṃ sattānaṃ khandhā pareheva kehici viññātattā paraviññāṇaviññātā nāma vuttā, tesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ purimato dukkaraṃ yehi parehi viññātatāya te paraviññāṇaviññātā nāma jātā, tesaṃ vattamānasantānānusārena viññātabbato. Te ca paraviññāṇaviññātā duvidhā parinibbutā aparinibbutāti. Tesu ca parinibbutānussaraṇaṃ dukkaraṃ sabbaso susamucchinnasantānattā. Taṃ pana sikhāppattaparaviññātaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha chinnavaṭumakā atīte parinibbutā khīṇāsavā chinnasaṃsāramaggattā . Ādi-saddena aparinibbutānaṃ paraviññāṇaviññātānampi sīhokkantikavasaena anussaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ. Yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussatīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
“Vihita”一词是“vidha”的同义词,故说“多种多样的”,意指依生、趣、胎等而有多类。或者,取“vihita”为“被运用、被描述”之义,在应说“以多种方式被描述”时,省略了中间词语而作表述,故说“以多种……被赞叹”。其中的“方式”,指名、姓等类别。“被赞叹”指被佛陀等所宣说。“随”字显示无间之义,故说“就在刚转向时”,以此表明遍作的开始。而“因为已圆满波罗蜜者”等句,则显示即使没有遍作也能成就。显示巴利原文
Vihita-saddo vidha-saddapariyāyoti āha ‘‘anekavidha’’nti, bhavayoniādivasena bahuvidhanti attho. Vihitanti vā payuttaṃ vaṇṇitanti atthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘anekehi pakārehi vihita’’nti vattabbe majjhepadalopaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhanti āha ‘‘anekehi…pe… saṃvaṇṇita’’nti. Pakārehīti nāmagottādipakārehi. Saṃvaṇṇitanti buddhādīhi kathitaṃ. Anu-saddo anantaratthadīpakoti āha ‘‘abhininnāmitamatte evā’’ti, etena ca parikammassa āraddhataṃ dasseti. Pūritapāramīnañhītiādinā parikammaṃ vināpi siddhiṃ dasseti.
“为了显示已开始的方式”,意指为了显示那些已开始随念的、过去曾住过的诸蕴。“生起”即是“生”,为“有”。那以单一业为根本、以执取和舍弃为界限的蕴相续,在此处被理解为“生”,故说“一个”等。“劫”指不可数劫,从意义上说,是依那样转起的法而施设的时间,由此可知有减损与增长。“坏”是具有坏灭、毁灭之义,故为“坏劫”,即不可数劫。与坏灭的毁灭共存,以之为性,故为“坏住劫”。“成”等也是如此。其中,“成”是成立、生起或增长。以火而毁灭,称为“火坏”。然而,从广度上说,坏的界限并无差别,故说“总是”。为了显示犹如一个城市,在生起的刹那因有变异而被称为“生处”,故说“在结生等时震动”。意思是,其威神力转起时,其中所包含的一切有情的疾病等灾祸得以止息。或者,“无论他期望多远”,这是指世尊在宣称于一刹那中以声音令一切处了知,以及显示自己的色身时,针对所缘境域而说的“无论他期望多远”。显示巴利原文
Āraddhappakāradassanattheti anussarituṃ āraddhānaṃ pubbe nivutthakkhandhānaṃ dassanatthe. Jāyatīti jāti, bhavo. So ekakammamūlako ādānanikkhepaparicchinno khandhappabandho idha ‘‘jātī’’ti adhippetoti āha ekampītiādi. Kappoti asaṅkhyeyyakappo, so pana atthato kālo tathāpavattadhammamupādāya paññatto, tesaṃ vasenassa parihāni ca vaḍḍhi ca veditabbā. Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭanaṃ vināso assa atthīti saṃvaṭṭo, asaṅkhyeyyakappo. Saṃvaṭṭena vināsena saha tiṭṭhati sīlenāti saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evaṃ vivaṭṭotiādīsupi. Tattha vivaṭṭanaṃ vivaṭṭo, uppatti, vaḍḍhi vā. Tejena vināso tejosaṃvaṭṭo. Vitthārato panāti puthulato pana saṃvaṭṭasīmābhedo natthi, tenāha ‘‘sadāpī’’ti. Ekanagariyā viya assa jātakkhaṇe vikārāpajjanato jātikkhettavohāroti dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭisandhiādīsu kampatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ānubhāvo pavattatīti tadantogadhānaṃ sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ rogādiupaddavo vūpasammatīti adhippāyo. Yaṃ yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyāti vuttanti yaṃ visayakkhettaṃ sandhāya ekasmiṃ eva khaṇe sabbattha sarena abhiviññāpanaṃ, attano rūpakāyadassanañca paṭijānantena bhagavatā ‘‘yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“在这些之中”是处格,表示简别。“食掉落之果者”,指以自己掉落的果实为食,这是针对苦行时期所说。“在此处的再生”,指在最后有的再生。“同一族姓”,即与兜率天的族姓为同一族姓。“其他”,指容貌等。“外道”,指主张业果论者。“导向”,指以导向为特征的、积累福慧的时期。“依死与结生”,指看见自己或他人于各各有的死之后,无有间隔、不触及任何中间,唯以把握结生的方式而如此了知,故说“因为他们”等。“以两种方式”,即依蕴的次第和依死与结生的方式。“以狮子跃入的方式”,也即指以狮子扑击的方式。精进因能烧灼、折磨烦恼,故称为“热勤”,所以说“以精进热勤”。显示巴利原文
Etesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Pavattaphalabhojanoti sayaṃpatitaphalāhāro, idañca tāpasakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idhūpapattiyāti idha carimabhave upapattiyā. Ekagottoti tusitagottena ekagotto. Itareti vaṇṇādayo. Titthiyāti kammaphalavādino. Abhinīhāroti abhinīhāropalakkhito puññañāṇasambharaṇakālo vutto. Cutipaṭisandhivasenāti attano parassa vā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve cutiṃ disvā antarā kiñci anāmasitvā paṭisandhiyā eva gahaṇavasena evaṃ jānanaṃ icchitappadesokkamananti āha tesañhītiādi. Ubhayathāpīti khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi cutipaṭisandhivasenapi. Sīhokkantavasenapīti sīhanipātavasenapi. Kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ ātāpoti āha ‘‘vīriyātāpenā’’ti.
天眼智论释显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
13 因存在于天界,故称为“天”;诸天的净信之眼被称为“天眼”,因此说“如同天界”。“亦”字表示即使对微细的所缘也能执取。由于依精进策励之力而成就,故一切修习,或特指具足精勤行的神足修习,都称为“精进修习”;所以说“由精进修习之力所生”。依天住之义,即依遍等至的四禅,以此说明其天性的远因。依止于天住,说明其近因——由作为近因的、属于天住的基础禅那所生。另一义为:依止于天住,即依于作为依止缘的、属于天住的、与自己相应的色界第四禅,天眼智得以生起。针对光耀之界与光明相结合,故说“以光明摄持”等。其中,“以光明摄持”即依遍光明而摄持之力。“以见之义”即是以见色的体性,由此显示“眼能见色、令色明了”的词源,说明这就是眼。“以执行眼的作用”是比喻:如同眼一般,所以称为眼,显示其相似之相;意思是它执行了见清净与不清净等称为眼的作用。显示巴利原文
13. Divi bhavattā dibbanti devānaṃ pasādacakkhu vuccatīti āha ‘‘dibbasadisattā’’ti. Dūrepīti pi-saddena sukhumassāpi ārammaṇassa gahaṇaṃ. Vīriyārambhavasena ijjhanato sabbāpi bhāvanā, padhānasaṅkhārasamannāgato vā iddhipādabhāvanāvisesato vīriyabhāvanāti āha ‘‘vīriyabhāvanābalanibbatta’’nti. Dibbavihāravasenāti kasiṇādijjhānacataukkavasena. Iminā dūrakāraṇatthe assa dibbabhāvamāha. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti iminā āsannakāraṇabhūtapādakajjhānato nibbattanti dibbavihārasannissitattāti imassa dibbavihārapaayāpannaṃ attanā sampayuttaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ nissayapaccayabhūtaṃ nissāya dibbacakkhuñāṇassa pavattattātipi attho. Divudhātussa jutigatiyogaṃ sandhāya ālokapaaggahenātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ālokapariggahenāti kasiṇālokapariggahavasena. Dassanaṭṭhenāti rūpadassanabhāvena, iminā ‘‘cakkhati rūpaṃ vibhāvetī’’ti nibbacanato cakkhuttaṃ dasseti. Cakkhukiccakaraṇenāti idaṃ cakkhumiva cakkhūti upamāya sadisanimittadassanaṃ, samavisamādidassanasaṅkhātassa cakkhukiccassa karaṇatoti attho.
“如所说”是指《小污垢经》中的经文段落。其中,关于“疑”等:世尊在菩提树下尚未完全觉悟时,以天眼看见种种色,生起“这到底是什么?这到底是什么?”的疑;随后,为了断除疑而不作意那些色时,生起了惛沉睡眠;为了断除它,再次作意一切色时,于罗刹等生起怖畏;为了去除怖畏而作意“于此有何可怖?”时,依靠自己作意的善巧,生起称为“踊跃”的、能毁坏三摩地的世俗喜;为了遮止它而令作意的精进力松弛时,生起称为“身懈怠”的粗重;为了遮止身懈怠而再策励精进时,生起过度精进;为了遮止过度精进而令精进松弛时,生起过度懈怠;遮止这些后,见天界色时,生起称为“希求”的渴爱;为了遮止希求而作意低劣等种种色时,生起称为“种种所缘散乱”的种种想。之后,舍弃它而唯作意一境时,生起对色的过度审察,即过度思惟。“光明”,指由遍作所起的光明。“且不见色”,应知为“因耽著于遍作光明之作意,故以天眼不见色”,如此结合生起次第之义。“人之此”指属于人的、人眼所行境的粗色。因为它属于人的所见近行处,所以称为“人近行处”,因此说“超越人近行处”。“以色之见”,是指以见远、微显示巴利原文
Yathāhāti upakkilesasuttappadesaṃ (ma. ni. 3.242) nidasseti. Tattha vicikicchātiādīsu bhagavato bodhimūle anabhisambuddhasseva dibbacakkhunā nānāvidhāni rūpāni passantassa ‘‘idaṃ nu kho kiṃ, idaṃ nu kho ki’’nti vicikicchā uppannā, tato pana vicikicchānivattanatthaṃ tāni rūpāni amanasikaroto amanasikarontassa thinamiddhaṃ uppannaṃ, tato nivattanatthaṃ puna sabbarūpāni manasikaroto rakkhasādīsu chambhitattaṃ uppannaṃ, ‘‘kimettha bhāyitabba’’nti bhayavinodanavasena manasikaroto attano manasikārakosallaṃ paṭicca uppilasaṅkhātā samādhidūsikā gehasitapīti uppannā, tannisedhāya manasikāravīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karontassa kāyālasiyasaṅkhātaṃ duṭṭhullaṃ, tannisedhāya puna vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato accāraddhavīriyaṃ, puna tannisedhāya vīriyaṃ sithilayato atilīnavīriyaṃ uppannaṃ, tannisedhetvā dibbarūpāni passato abhijappāsaṅkhātā taṇhā uppannā, tannisedhāya hīnādinānārūpāni manasikaroto nānārammaṇavikkhepasaṅkhātā nānattasaññā uppannā. Puna taṃ vihāya ekameva manasikaroto atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ ativiya cintanaṃ uppannaṃ. Obhāsanti parikammasamuṭṭhitaṃ obhāsaṃ . Na ca rūpāni passāmīti ‘‘parikammobhāsamanasikārapasutatāya dibbacakkhunā rūpāni na passāmī’’ti evaṃ uppattikkamasahito attho veditabbo, manussānaṃ idanti mānusakaṃ mānusakacakkhugocaraṃ thūlarūpaṃ vuccati. Tadeva manussānaṃ dassanūpacārattā manussūpacāroti āha ‘‘manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā’’ti. Rūpadassanenāti dūrasukhumādirūpadassanena.
天眼智必定以先前已生起且住立的色为所缘,若无转向与遍作则不能生起;而且当其生起时,由于羸弱,正在坏灭的色不能成为它的所缘;死亡心恰于业生色坏灭的刹那生起,结生心则于生起的刹那生起,因此说“死时刹那”等。这里“见色”即是“见有情”,所以用“正在死亡者”等依补特伽罗安立而说。“美、丑”,这是就“色”一词也有表示形状之义而说,如在“化作大如象王之形色”等处。“已至善趣者”即是善逝,所以称为“于善趣道”。“以此句”指“随业而往”这一句。显示巴利原文
Yasmā niyamena purejātaṭṭhitarūpārammaṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ āvajjanaparikammehi vinā na uppajjati, na ca uppajjamānaṃ bhijjamānaṃ rūpamassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti dubbalattā, cuticittañca kammajarūpassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe eva uppajjati, paṭisandhicittañca upapattikkhaṇe, tasmā āha cutikkhaṇetiādi. Rūpadassanamevettha sattadassananti cavamānetiādinā puggalādhiṭṭhānena vuttaṃ. Abhirūpe virūpetipīti idaṃ vaṇṇa-saddassa saṇṭhānavācakataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvātiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) viya. Sundaraṃ gatiṃ gatā sugatāti āha ‘‘sugatigate’’ti. Iminā pana padenāti yathākammupageti iminā padena.
见到地狱有情被火网、刀剑等击打而身色破碎后,凭其随后生起的欲界速行心了知他们领受苦受,此亦属天眼所见之果,故说“此即天眼之作用”。“如是作意”者,谓为了知他们之业,入根本禅那而出定后,以遍作之力作意:“是何业耶?”等。其时,彼业成为所缘,于转向、遍作等之上,与色界第四禅相应之智生起,此即名为“随业趣向智”,如此连结。于见天众,亦同此理。“无别遍作”者,谓如同宿住等,天眼智无有脱离天眼智遍作之外的别遍作。然而,此处有说者言:“无需根本禅那入定等遍作,仅于‘是何业耶?’等作意之后,即取业及与业相应之法为所缘,生起安止路心。于未来分智亦然,故说无别遍作……乃至……与天眼俱成就。”此不应取,因即使已得自在之神通,若无根本禅那等遍作亦不生起。且仅以根本禅那等,即不名为别遍作,故应取“这些智唯依天眼而成就”。于未来分智亦然:为欲知以天眼所见有情于未来之转起,于根本禅那等之后,依智之力,于未来多劫中可能生起的、属于过去自体所摄的五蕴、彼所系属及彼所缘之一切世间出世间法及假名,于一刹那取为所缘而生起的与第四禅相应之智。显示巴利原文
Nerayikānaṃ aggijālasatthanipātādīhi vibhinnasarīravaṇṇaṃ disvā tadanantarehi kāmāvacarajavaneheva ñātaṃ tesaṃ dukkhānubhavanampi dassanaphalāyattatāya ‘‘dibbacakkhukiccamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ manasikarotīti tesaṃ kammassa ñātukāmatāvasena pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya parikammavasena kinnu khotiādinā manasikaroti. Athassa taṃ kammaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā āvajjanaparikammādīnaṃ upari uppannena rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānena sampayuttaṃ yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, idaṃ yathākammupagañāṇaṃ nāmāti yojanā. Devānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo. Visuṃ parikammanti pubbenivāsādīnaṃ viya dibbacakkhuñāṇaparikammaṃ vinā visuṃ parikammaṃ natthi. Keci panettha ‘‘pādakajjhānasamāpajjanaparikammehi kiccaṃ natthi, kinnu kho kammantiādimanasikārānantarameva kammaṃ. Kammasīsena taṃsampayutte ca dhamme ārammaṇaṃ katvā appanāvīthi uppajjati. Evamanāgataṃsañāṇepi, teneva visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi…pe… dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantīti vutta’’nti vadanti. Taṃ na gahetabbaṃ vasībhūtānampi abhiññānaṃ pādakajjhānādiparikammaṃ vinā anuppattito. Pādakajjhānādimattena ca visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma na hotīti dibbacakkhunāva etāni ñāṇāni siddhānīti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassāpīti dibbacakkhunā diṭṭhassa sattassa anāgate pavattiṃ ñātukāmatāya pādakajjhānādīnamanantaraṃ ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ anāgatesu anekakappesu uppajjanārahe pubbe attabhāvapariyāpanne pañcakkhandhe tappaṭibaddhe tadārammaṇe ca sabbe lokiyalokuttaradhamme sammutiñca ekakkhaṇe ālambitvā uppajjanakassa catutthajjhānasampayuttassa anāgataṃsañaāṇassāpi visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthīti yojanā.
然而,有些论师在此主张:“在宿住随念中,也有对名、姓等的把握,但这并非发生在神通智的刹那,而是在其后的欲界速行刹那中,因为在构想命名时不可能有其他构想,且业与转生没有边际。然而,当所有遍作相的法与义在单一刹那被神通智照见后,随后依喜好以欲界心产生‘他叫这个名字’等构想,如同眼识照见众多色法后产生‘柱子、瓶子’等构想一样。而且,即使某处未被构想,它也是可被构想的,因此一切名、姓等实际上都是被构想出来的。正如这里一样,在宿住随念中,也是针对可被构想的部分,在经典中以‘他叫这个名字’等附带说明的方式宣说。”显示巴利原文
Keci panettha ‘‘pubbenivāsānussatiyaṃ viya nāmagottādigahaṇampi attheva, tañca na abhiññākkhaṇe, atha kho tadanantaresu kāmāvacarajavanakkhaṇesu eva hoti nāmaparikappakāle itaraparikappāsambhavā kammenuppattiyañca pariyantābhāvā. Sabbaparikammanimittesu pana dhammesu atthesupi ekakkhaṇe abhiññāya diṭṭhesu yathārucivasena pacchā evaṃnāmotiādinā kāmāvacaracittena vikappo uppajjati cakkhunā diṭṭhesu bahūsu rūpesu thambhakumbhādivikappo viya. Yañca kattha avikappitaṃ, tampi vikappanārahanti sabbaṃ nāmagottādito vikappitameva hoti. Yathā cettha, evaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiyampi parikappārahatampi sandhāya pāḷiyaṃ evaṃnāmotiādinā apadesasahitameva vutta’’nti vadanti. Aññe pana ‘‘nāmagottādikaṃ sabbampi ekakkhaṇe paññāyati, abhirucitaṃ pana vacasā voharantī’’ti vadanti, tepi atthato purimehi sadisā eva, pubbe diṭṭhassa puna vohārakālepi parikappetabbato parikappārahadhammadassanameva tehipi atthato upagataṃ. Eke pana ‘‘so tato cuto amutra udapādintiādivacanato kameneva atītānāgatadhammajānanena nāmagottādīhi saddhiṃ gahaṇaṃ sukara’’nti vadanti, taṃ ayuttameva buddhānampi sabbaṃ ñātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sabbaññutāhānippasaṅgato. Pāḷiyaṃ ime vata bhontotiādi yathākammupagañāṇassa pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Kāyavācādi cettha kāyavacīviññattiyo.
“沉重”是因其类似无间业而说。因为若未请求原谅,它即成为无间业。“他的”指具有沉重性质的诽谤。“年长者”指仅在年龄上年长,而非在智慧上,应知这是以轻蔑心说:“他连一点世间常识都不懂,只是由于令我们蒙羞而成为众中败类”,从而毁坏功德而诽谤。“贤友”等语,是长老期望他证得更高道果,出于悲悯而显露自己。“恢复如常”意指不再成为道的障碍。“比自己年长”指自己也是年长者。此处“蹲坐”在《清净道论》中有说。阿那含与阿罗汉为了未来防护,不会请求原谅,其余则可能出于过失而请求,故说“如果他不原谅”。显示巴利原文
Bhāriyanti ānantariyasadisattā vuttaṃ. Khamāpane hi asati ānantariyameva. Tassāti bhāriyasabhāvassa upavādassa. Mahallakoti kevalaṃ vayasāva mahallako, na ñāṇena, ‘‘nāyaṃ kiñci lokavohāramattampi jānāti, parisadūsako eva amhākaṃ lajjitabbassa karaṇato’’ti adhippāyena hīḷetvā vuttattā guṇaparidhaṃsanena upavadatīti veditabbaṃ. Āvusotiādinā thero uparimagguppattimassa ākaṅkhanto karuṇāya attānamāvikāsi. Pākatikaṃ ahosīti maggāvaraṇaṃ nāhosīti adhippāyo. Attanā vuḍḍhataroti sayampi vuḍḍho. Etthāpi ‘‘ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā’’ti visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Anāgāmī arahā ca āyatiṃ saṃvaratthāya na khameyyuṃ, sesā dosenapīti āha ‘‘sace so na khamatī’’ti.
“那些……劝导者,他们也受持邪见业”——应当如此连接。“具戒者”等,从严格意义上说,是指住于最上道者,因为只有他必定能令他人成就;或者,其他最后有者安住于戒等,他们也必定能证得其他(阿罗汉果)。“其他”指阿罗汉果。“如此具足”意为如此产生的。“如同无失误产生的(果)一样,此亦必然产生于地狱中”是这个意思。为了说明被称为“如此具足”的,故说“彼语”等。“彼语”指诽谤圣者。“心”指诽谤圣者的心。“见”指在诽谤圣者时不见过失的邪见。若以“我将舍弃这一切”的心态忏悔过失后,未以请求原谅的方式舍弃、未放弃,则如同被地狱狱卒带来安置于地狱中一样,就这样被安置于地狱中;仅因诽谤圣者,他便必定如此生于地狱,如同以道证果一样,是必然产生的——这是此处的意旨。显示巴利原文
Ye ca…pe… samādapenti, tepi micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti yojetabbaṃ. Sīlasampannotiādīsu nippariyāyato aggamaggaṭṭho adhippeto tasseva aññārādhanā niyamato, sesāpi vā pacchimabhavikā sīlādīsu ṭhitā tesampi aññuppattiniyamato. Aññanti arahattaphalaṃ. Evaṃ sampadanti evaṃ nibbattikaṃ. Yathā taṃ avirajjhanakanibbattikaṃ, evamidampi etassa niraye nibbattananti attho. Yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘evaṃsampadamida’’nti niddiṭṭhaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ taṃ vācantiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ vācanti ariyūpavādaṃ. Cittanti ariyūpavādakacittaṃ. Diṭṭhinti ariyūpavāde dosābhāvadassanadiṭṭhiṃ. ‘‘Sabbametaṃ pajahissāmī’’ti cittena accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanavasena appahāya appaṭinissajjitvā. Yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā nirayapālehi āharitvā niraye ṭhapito, evaṃ niraye ṭhapito eva, ariyūpavādenevassa idaṃ niyamena niraye nibbattanaṃ yathā maggena phalaṃ sampajjati, evaṃ sampajjanakanti adhippāyo.
邪见是一切恶的根本,故为最上;那些过失以邪见为最上,故称“以邪见为最上的过失”,即一切过失中,邪见为最上过失之意。未离贪者,死后即是另一有的生起,故说“死后,即其紧接转起的诸蕴”。“身坏”指命根断绝,因为身体随维持它的命根断绝而坏灭,故说“身坏,即命根断绝”。“从此乐而来”为“福”。“来处”指由来或原因。“从可爱所缘等而生起”为“味”。“似阿修罗”指似饿鬼阿修罗。显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhi sabbapāpamūlattā paramā padhānā yesaṃ vajjānaṃ tāni micchādiṭṭhiparamāni vajjāni, sabbavajjehi micchādiṭṭhiyeva paramaṃ vajjanti attho. Avītarāgassa maraṇato paraṃ nāma bhavantarupādānamevāti āha ‘‘paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe’’ti. Yena tiṭṭhati, tassa upacchedeneva kāyo bhijjatīti āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassupacchedā’’ti. Eti etasmā sukhanti ayo, puññaṃ. Āyassāti āgamanassa, hetussa vā. Ayati iṭṭhārammaṇādīhi pavattatīti āyo, assādo. Asurasadisanti petāsurasadisaṃ.
漏尽智论释显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
14 “以通达自性相”指通过不迷惑地通达称为自性的相。“产生”指令生起。“到达彼处”指到达涅槃——它作为道之所缘缘的处所、作为因。“不转起”指不转起之因。“依烦恼”指依那些漏,由断除它们而令此智成为漏尽智,即依诸漏而摄尽一切烦恼,这是从异门、从另一方式说的意思。在经典中,虽依过去时而说“了知”,但依现观时各各了知的现在性,故以现在时说“如是知、如是见”来说明。因为从欲漏等解脱时,见漏亦必然随之解脱,故应知见漏的解脱亦如是。显示巴利原文
14.Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Nibbattikanti nipphādanaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena ṭhānaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Appavattinti appavattihetuṃ. Kilesavasenāti yesaṃ āsavānaṃ khepanena idaṃ ñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ jātaṃ, tesaṃ kilesānaṃ vasena, tesaṃ āsavānaṃ vasena sabbakilesānaṃ saṅgahaṇato pariyāyato pakārantaratoti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ atītakālavasena ‘‘abbhaññāsi’’nti vatvāpi abhisamayakāle tassa tassa jānanassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālena niddeso kato. Kāmāsavādīnaṃ vimuccaneneva tadavinābhāvato diṭṭhāsavassāpi vimutti veditabbā.
了知‘生已尽’是依漏尽省察而作;了知‘梵行已立’等是依道、果、涅槃省察而作,因此说‘以生已尽等语,彼之范围’。其中,‘范围’指所缘境。为了显示:即使在三时中,对于生的灭尽,直接的加行虽不可能现起,但为此而作加行仍具意义,且其果即是未来诸蕴的不再生起,故说‘然而,由于道未修习……’等语。因为,以‘由于道未修习’等语说明:若未以道断除烦恼,未来诸蕴的生起便会存在;若以道灭尽那些烦恼,诸蕴便不会生起。又,烦恼具有三时性,如于‘生’中所说的方法,即使以某种缘可能灭除,但在心相续中生起与烦恼相违的圣道刹那,方是其灭尽;如同将火把置于种子的相续中,令未来的种子不生起一般,由于与烦恼相违的缘现前,未来便不再生起。因此,以道刹那的生起所成的烦恼灭尽,令作为烦恼之果的诸蕴在未来不再生起,这即是‘生已尽’——此义得以阐明。由此故说:‘由于道已修习,以证得不生起法性而说“已尽”。’此处,此义为:名为‘烦恼灭尽’的道已修习、已生起,以缘的灭尽故不再生起的诸蕴之生,以其未来不再生起所成立的‘不生起法性’而说‘已尽’。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khīṇā jātī’’ti jānanaṃ kilesakkhayapaccavekkhaṇavasena, vusitaṃ brahmacariyantiādijānanaṃ maggaphalanibbānapaccavekkhaṇavasena hotīti āha ‘‘khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmi’’nti. Tattha bhūminti visayaṃ, tīsu kālesupi jātikkhayaṃ pati ujukameva vāyāmāsambhavepi taṃ pati vāyāmakaraṇassa sātthakataṃ, tassa anāgatakkhandhānuppattiphalatañca dassetuṃ yā panātiādi vuttaṃ. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattātiādinā hi maggenāvihatakileseheva āyatiṃ khandhānaṃ jāti hessati, tesañca kilesānaṃ maggena vināse sati khandhā na jāyissanti, kilesānañca tekālikatāya jātiyaṃ vuttanayena kenaci paccayena vināsayogepi cittasantāne kilesaviruddhaariyamaggakkhaṇuppādanameva tabbināso viruddhapaccayopanipātena āyatiṃ anuppajjanato bījasantāne aggikkhandhopanipātena āyatiṃ bījattānuppatti viya, iti maggakkhaṇuppattisaṅkhātakilesābhāvena kilesaphalānaṃ khandhānaṃ āyatiṃ anuppattiyeva jātikkhayoti ayamattho vibhāvīyati, tenāha ‘‘maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā’’ti. Ettha cāyamattho kilesābhāvasaṅkhātassa maggassa bhāvitattā uppāditattā paccayābhāvena anuppajjantī khandhānaṃ jāti tena āyatiṃ anuppajjanasaṅkhātena anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena vohārato khīṇā me jātīti. Na hi saṅkhatadhammānaṃ paccayantarena vināso sambhavati, sambhave ca tassa paccayantaratādippasaṅgato. Tabbiruddhakkhaṇuppādanameva tabbināsuppādanaṃ. Tanti khīṇajātiṃ abbhaññāsinti sambandho. Itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthāya. Dassentoti nigamanavasena dassentoti.
优婆塞性表白论释显示巴利原文
Upāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
15 ‘无明’一词因与‘dhi’字结合,故为属格义之用格。‘足’即脚。‘以随从’指以眷属。‘于热闹节庆’指于热闹与节庆中。‘此’是‘超越’之声。为显示此非因重诵而说两次,而是依两种义理,故说‘或者’等语。以无差别、义共相而成就的‘殊妙’,是抽象中性词的表述;即使观待说法之净妙等差别,亦同样成立,因先前已成就,故说‘殊妙……净妙’。‘向下放置’指被某人向下放置。‘自生向下’指自己成为向下。‘以诸同义语’指以诸方式,或以说明无味性等的诸因。显示巴利原文
15.Aññāṇanti dhi-saddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Pādānīti pāde. Yasasāti parivārena. Kotūhalacchareti kotūhale acchare ca. Ayanti amikkanta-saddo. Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento atha vātiādimāha. Avisesena atthasāmaññena nipphanno abhikkantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, desanāpasādādivisesāpekkhāyapi tatheva tiṭṭhati pubbe nipphannattāti āha ‘‘abhikkantaṃ…pe… pasādo’’ti. Adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ kenaci. Heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ sayameva. Pariyāyehīti pakārehi, arasarūpattādipaṭipādakakāraṇehi vā.
由于‘去’词根无双宾语性,‘我皈依乔达摩’此语中,两句亦非对格。然而,为显示前句为对格,后句为主格,故说‘我皈依乔达摩’。由此亦显示‘iti’字是省略标示。‘从苦’指从苦、从恶。因‘诸贤’一词期待从格,故唯从格为恰当。‘已证道、已现证灭’以此两句亦唯显示果位者,非道位者;为显示此义,故说‘于依教奉行者’。以‘广说’一词,含摄‘诸比丘,凡诸行法或无行法,离染于他们中被称为最上’之所说文。‘不动’指无渴爱。‘无违逆’因显示无违逆义,故为无违逆、清净或殊妙。‘熟练’因应令语业熟练,或因具足殊胜之声义功德而结合。‘和合’指结合、会合。‘于彼处’指于那些双人之中——此为连结。‘八人见法者’指他们八人因已见圣法,故为‘见法者’。显示巴利原文
Gamudhātussa dvikammakattābhāvā gotamaṃ saraṇanti idaṃ padadvayampi na upayogavacanaṃ. Api ca kho purimameva, pacchimaṃ pana paccattavacananti dassetuṃ ‘‘gotamaṃ saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena ca iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti dasseti. Aghassāti aghato pāpato. Tātāti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā nissakkasseva yuttattā. Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodheti padadvayenāpi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Vitthāroti iminā ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) vuttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Anejanti nittaṇhaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhatthadīpanato aviruddhasuciṃ paṇītaṃ vā. Vācāya paguṇīkattabbato, pakaṭṭhehi saddatthaguṇehi yogato vā paguṇaṃ. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito sameto . Yatthāti yesu purisayugesūti sambandho. Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā teti te aṭṭha puggalā ariyadhammassa diṭṭhattā dhammadasā.
在“皈依”等词语中,此是略义:以怖畏、摧破等含义,三宝名为“皈依”;即此三宝是我的庇护、藏身处、归宿——依于佛陀善觉性等功德,生起以彼为归宿的心,这心识的生起即名为“皈依”。具足如此所述之心者,即称为“皈依”。此皈依有世间与出世间两种分类。其中,出世间皈依唯在道刹那,以断除皈依的随烦恼而成就。世间皈依以四种方式生起:以“我把自己奉献给佛陀”等自我奉献;以前述的以彼为归宿;以弟子身份的归向;以及以礼拜。应知,在一切处,此皈依唯以最殊胜的应供状态而成立,并非以亲属、怖畏、师长等为理由。如此,若以亲属等为由礼拜外道,皈依不破;若以应供的状态礼拜其他,皈依则破。世间皈依有决定得涅槃之果,因为皈依者于未来必定得涅槃,故说有相似之果。然而,获得一切世间成就与超越恶趣苦等,是其利益之果。对三皈依处的疑惑、邪智等是杂染。其破坏有有过与无过两种。其中,第一种以邪见为先,由礼拜外道等而生,此因会得不爱果,故为有过。无过的破坏则因死亡而生。出世间皈依于一切时无杂染亦无破坏——应当了知。显示巴利原文
Saraṇantiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – bhayahiṃsanādiatthena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ nāma, tadeva me ratanattayaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ parāyaṇanti buddhasubuddhatādiguṇavasena tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ nāma. Yathāvuttena iminā cittuppādena samannāgato saraṇaṃ gacchati nāma. Etassa ca saraṇagamanassa lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidho pabhedo. Tattha lokuttaraṃ saraṇagamanūpakkilesasamucchedena maggakkhaṇeyeva sijjhati. Lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ catudhā pavattati ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa pariccajāmītiādinā attaniyyātanena, yathāvuttatapparāyaṇatāya, sissabhāvūpagamanena, paṇipātena cāti. Sabbatthāpi cettha seṭṭhadakkhiṇeyyabhāvavaseneva saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na ñātibhayācariyādivasenāti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ ñātiādivasena titthiyaṃ vandato saraṇaṃ na bhijjati, dakkhiṇeyyabhāvena aññaṃ vandato saraṇaṃ bhijjati. Lokiyassa saraṇagamanassa nibbānappattiniyamaṃ sadisaphalaṃ saraṇagatassa anāgate nibbānappattiniyamato. Sabbalokiyasampattisamadhigamo pana apāyadukkhādisamatikkamo ca ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Tīsu vatthūsu cassa saṃsayamicchāñāṇādi saṃkileso. Bhedopissa sāvajjānavajjavasena duvidho. Tattha paṭhamo micchādiṭṭhipubbakehi titthiyapaṇipātādīhi hoti, so ca aniṭṭhaphalattā sāvajjo. Anavajjo pana kālakiriyāya hoti. Lokuttarasaraṇagamanassa sabbathā saṃkileso vā bhedo vā natthīti veditabbaṃ.
“谁是优婆塞”等,是询问优婆塞身份的本质、原因等。其中,凡是在家之人,无论是人或非人,依前述方式皈依三宝者,即是优婆塞。又因为通过皈依等行为亲近、侍奉三宝,故称为“优婆塞”。不杀生等五学处是他的戒。舍弃五种邪贩卖等邪命,以正法、公平的方式谋生,是他的正命。无信、恶戒等是优婆塞身份的退失,这些的灭除则是成就,应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Ko upāsakotiādi upāsakattasarūpakāraṇādipucchā. Tattha yo gahaṭṭho manusso vā amanusso vā vuttanayena tisaraṇaṃ gato, ayaṃ upāsako. Yo ca saraṇagamanādikiriyāya ratanattayaṃ upāsanato ‘‘upāsako’’ti vuccati. Pañca veramaṇiyo cassa sīlaṃ. Pañcamicchāvāṇijjādipāpājīvaṃ pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanamassa ājīvo. Assaddhiyadussīlatādayo upāsakattassa vipatti, tadabhāvo sampattīti veditabbā.
“以住处计”指以寝室等居住场所的部分来计量。“今日的状态”指在今天生起的净信等。以身表为因的身体部分称为身肢。以语表为因的唇舌等称为语肢。“不移动”即不使动摇。以此说明:在语言发生的前阶段,作为住处与根门动摇之缘的风大变化行相,并非单独的身表,因为那时没有需要单独表达的特殊意图,且它有助于语表,故只包含在语表中。正如以身体在抓痒等时,作为发声之缘的地大的行相变化,由于不表达特殊意图,故不是语表;这里也是如此。因为能表达意图,这些才称为“表”,并非仅仅因为是风大、地大的动摇或发声之缘的变化行相。同样应了知:外界树木等的动摇、发声之缘的上述行相变化,并非表,此义已得成立。有些人将“语肢”解释为“好吧,可以”等语言的组成部分等,这与“不移动”的说法不符。“令同意后”意为令其生起许可。也有“持同意”的异读,意思是以不外出的方式把握。“面朝向”指面向世尊,因此说“不离开”。显示巴利原文
Vihāraggenāti ovarakādivasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsena. Ajjabhāvanti asmiṃ ahani pavattaṃ pasādādiṃ. Kāyaviññattihetuko sarīrāvayavo kāyaṅgaṃ. Vacīviññattihetukaṃ oṭṭhajivhādi vācaṅgaṃ. Acopetvāti acāletvā. Etena ca vacīpavattiyā pubbabhāge ṭhānakaraṇānaṃ calanapaccayo vāyodhātuyā vikārākāro visuṃ kāyaviññatti na hoti, tena visuṃ viññāpetabbassa adhippāyassa abhāvā vacīviññattiyameva saṅgayhati tadupakārattā. Yathā kāyena kāyakaṇḍuyanādīsu sadduppattihetubhūto pathavīdhātuyā ākāravikāro visuṃ adhippāyassa aviññāpanato vacīviññatti na hoti, evamayampīti dasseti. Adhippāyaviññāpanato hetā viññattiyo nāma jātā, na kevalaṃ vāyupathavīnaṃ calanasadduppattipaccayabhūtavikārākāramattatāya. Evañca bahiddhā rukkhādīsu calanasadduppattipaccayānaṃ yathāvuttappakārānaṃ vikārākārānaṃ aviññattitā samatthitā hotīti veditabbā. Keci vācaṅganti ‘‘hotu sādhū’’ti evamādivācāya avayavantiādiṃ vadanti, taṃ acopetvāti iminā na sameti. Khantiṃ cāretvāti anumatiṃ pavattetvā. ‘‘Khantiṃ dhāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, bahi anikkhamanavasena gaṇhitvāti attho. Paṭimukhoti bhagavati paṭinivattamukho, tenāha ‘‘apakkamitvā’’ti.
16 因为“乞求”这个动词词根带双宾语,所以经文说“世尊被请求雨安居的住处”。为了把“即使在丰收时节”这句话的意思说清楚,又补充了“即使在谷价极贱时”——这是指即使谷价极贱,只要给出少许东西就能换来大量谷麦的时节。“乞求者”就是请求者。“所说的庄稼”指已经播种的庄稼。“在那里”是说在毘兰若,由此显示“播种的只是穗子,因此这里叫‘穗播’”,这是用组成部分后置的方式解释这一限定复合词。或者也可以这样理解:“一切庄稼都只长成穗子般大小,在这里生长、成熟,所以称为‘穗播’”,因此说“只长成穗子”。“靠穗子过活,所以是‘穗播’”,为了显示这一构词解释,而说“以穗子”等。“在打谷场”是指在量度谷物的场所。“验色者”指的是检验金币的人。显示巴利原文
16. Yācadhātussa dvikammakattā ‘‘bhagavā vassāvāsaṃ yācito’’ti vuttaṃ. Susassakālepīti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘atisamagghepī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ativiya appagghepi yadā kiñcideva datvā bahuṃ pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaṃ gaṇhanti, tādise kālepīti attho. Bhikkhamānāti yācamānā. Vuttasassanti vapitasassaṃ. Tatthāti verañjāyaṃ, etena ‘‘vuttaṃ salākā eva hoti etthāti salākāvuttā’’ti visesanassa paranipātena nibbacanaṃ dasseti. Atha vā ‘‘sabbaṃ sassaṃ salākāmattameva vuttaṃ nibbattaṃ sampannaṃ etthāti salākāvuttā’’tipi nibbacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘salākā eva sampajjatī’’ti. ‘‘Salākāya vuttaṃ jīvikā etissanti salākāvuttā’’tipi nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ salākāya vātiādi vuttaṃ. Dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāneti dhaññaminanaṭṭhāne. Vaṇṇajjhakkhanti kahāpaṇaparikkhakaṃ.
在“以捡拾、以钵”这句中,“以钵”是指用钵,也就是拿着钵。因为钵是用来接受食物的器具,所以称为“捡拾器”,即钵。因此说“以捡拾、以钵”等。又或者,“以钵”就是“以拿取”,意思是:为了捡拾而应当拿取的钵,此义可以成立,所以说“拿着钵”。显示巴利原文
Uñchena paggahenāti ettha paggahenāti pattena, taṃ gahetvāti attho. Paggayhati etena bhikkhāti hi paggaho, patto. Tenāha paggahenayo uñchotiādi. Atha vā paggahenāti gahaṇena, uñchatthāya gahetabbo pattoti sijjhatīti āha ‘‘pattaṃ gahetvā’’ti.
恒河以北的地区称为北道,那里是他们的居住地,或者从那里来的人称为北道人,因此说“北道居民”等。也有“北道者”的异读,依词源学的解释,意思相同。“殿”指的是马厩。也有人写成“曼陀罗”,但这并不恰当。因为那马厩形状是圆的,又有多种样式,所以经中说“马圈”。显示巴利原文
Gaṅgāya uttaradisāpadeso uttarāpatho, so nivāso etesaṃ, tato vā āgatāti uttarāpathakā, tenāha uttarāpathavāsikātiādi. ‘‘Uttarāhakā’’tipi pāṭho, so eva attho niruttinayena. Mandiranti assasālaṃ. ‘‘Mandara’’ntipi likhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Sā ca mandirā yasmā parimaṇḍalākārena bahuvidhā ca katā, tasmā ‘‘assamaṇḍalikāyo’’ti vuttā.
恒河以南的区域称为南道,生于该处之人称为南道人。“以佛为我的”指习惯性地执取“佛是我的”,即皈依佛者,对其余诸句也应如此理解。“如是”指依照下文所述方式把握含义之时。“份”即份额。“与之相适的”指与之相应的、足够的那份。“得到”与“没有”是相连的,意为得到之后却未能保有。另有一种异读将“得到”理解为“无处可得”,意思是:全然未曾获得侍者的地位。“亲戚”与因具足最胜功德而称的“最胜”合称“亲戚中最胜者”。其意是说:在食物匮乏的时期,不做说法开示等事,安住于极为严格的头陀行、保持活命清净,以契合世尊心意的方式来安排饮食,唯有具足敬爱之心的圣弟子才适合如此行事。显示巴利原文
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇāya disāya deso dakkhiṇāpatho, tattha jātā manussā dakkhiṇāpathamanussā. Buddhaṃ mamāyanti mamevāyanti gaṇhanasīlā buddhamāmakā, evaṃ sesesupi. Evanti pacchā vuttanayena atthe gayhamāne. Paṭivīsanti koṭṭhāsaṃ. Tadupiyanti tadanurūpaṃ tappahonakaṃ. Laddhāti labhitvā no hotīti sambandho. ‘‘Laddho’’ti vā pāṭho, upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ neva labhinti attho. Ñāti ca pasatthatamaguṇayogato seṭṭho cāti ñātiseṭṭho. Evarūpesu ṭhānesu ayameva patirūpoti āmisassa dullabhakālesu parikathobhāsādiṃ akatvā paramasallekhavuttiyā ājīvasuddhiyaṃ ṭhatvā bhagavato adhippāyānuguṇaṃ āmisaṃ vicārentena nāma ñātisinehayuttena ariyasāvakeneva kātuṃ yuttanti adhippāyo.
“魔的旋转”指被魔所转动的心,即内心的迷惑。“那也能”指也能旋转北俱卢洲或三十三天城。显示巴利原文
Mārāvaṭṭanāyāti mārena katacittaparivaṭṭanena, cittasammohanenāti attho. Tampīti uttarakuruṃ vā tidasapuraṃ vā āvaṭṭeyya.
“我在弗沙佛的教法中,辱骂了弟子们;”
吃大麦吧,尽情享用;但不要吃粳米。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Phussassāhaṃ pāvacane, sāvake paribhāsayiṃ; Yavaṃ khādatha bhuñjatha, mā ca bhuñjatha sālayo’’ti. (apa. thera 1.39.88) –
《譬喻》中所说的不善,是由于那时它得到了机会。“固定施”即是以“我将施与”之语所决定的布施。“付诸行动”即是以身体拿去施与所施之物。“堪忍”即能够。“简言之”即是以摘要的方式。所谓“一寻光”,是指在周围、下方及上方各约八十手的范围内,密集的六色光芒从此处如从打磨过的铜盘射出一般,向十方放射。由于那光芒看似仅有一寻,故称“一寻光”。又因这些随好各自与世尊身上的光之成就相结合,在虚空中如同日月等一般清晰照耀,所以说它们与一寻光合在一起,是任何光明所不能胜过的。显示巴利原文
Apadāne vuttassa akusalassa tadā okāsakatattā. Nibaddhadānassāti ‘‘dassāmā’’ti vācāya niyamitadānassa. Appitavattassāti kāyena atiharitvā dinnavatthunopi. Visahatīti sakkoti. Saṅkhepenāti nīhārena. Byāmappabhāyāti samantato heṭṭhā ca upari ca asītihatthamatte ṭhāne ghanībhūtāya chabbaṇṇāya pabhāya, yato chabbaṇṇaraṃsiyo taḷākato mātikāyo viya nikkhamitvā dasasu disāsu dhāvanti, sā yasmā byāmamattā viya khāyati, tasmā ‘‘byāmappabhā’’ti vuccati. Yasmā anubyañjanāni ca paccekaṃ bhagavato sarīre pabhāsampattiyuttā ākāse candasūriyādayo viya vibhātā virocanti, tasmā tāni byāmappabhāya saha kenaci anabhibhavanīyāni vuttāni.
“无义关联”意指期望伤害,这是属格意义下的位格,故说“对如此言语之伤害”。在这里,由于说法之因而产生义理,或者通过它而由说法等产生义理,所以称为“义处”;这便是当前发生的事缘。显示巴利原文
Anatthasañhiteti ghātāpekkhaṃ sāmiatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘tādisassa vacanassa ghāto’’ti. Attho dhammadesanāya hetu uppajjati ettha, dhammadesanādiko vā attho uppajjati etāyāti aṭṭhuppatti, paccuppannavatthu.
“取其一”指从说法与制立学处这两者中,取其作为说法因缘的那一项。“或夜分”是依七日应作事前往,于外令日轮升起而说,非依雨安居分而说,因为后者另作别说。由此应知:在雨安居分的因缘中,也允许以七日应作事前往。“不于任何”即不因期待任何功德而轻视。“随后我们将受持戒”,是针对为活命而显示寂静功德、活命失败而作此言说。“将轻视”即将会鄙视。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ gahetvāti dhammadesanāsikkhāpadapaññattisaṅkhātesu dvīsu dhammadesanākāraṇaṃ gahetvā. Ratticchedo vāti sattāhakaraṇīyavasena gantvā bahi aruṇuṭṭhāpanavasena vutto, na vassacchedavasena tassa visuṃ vuccamānattā. Etena ca vassacchedapaccaye sattāhakaraṇīyena gamanaṃ anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Na kismiñcīti kismiñci guṇe sambhāvanāvasena na maññanti. Pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmāti ājīvahetu santaguṇappakāsanena ājīvavipattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atimaññissatīti avamaññissati.
17 “具寿”是亲爱语,先依高族与低族的通称而说,后来又为显示专就高族而言,故说为“重敬与顺从之语”。其中,具备顺从与依止,故称具顺从、具依止,意思是对于具足重德者的敬语。此处“语”即“名称”。“地味”是劫初在水上最先由地界生起的物质,如新鲜酥团,能在水中上浮、不沉没,极柔软、极甘甜,厚达数万由旬,称为味所欲的地汁。劫初之人因对味的渴爱而取食,由其业力,上方部分变得粗硬,下方则保持原状。又因地味之力,此大地连同山脉、海洋、林木,在下层水中不沉没、不散坏,如同安放在木块上般稳固而住,这便是地之精髓,故说“地髓”等。“具足”即具足甜味,故说“味甜”。“果丰”即果实丰多。说了“无蝇”之后,又说“无蝇块”,以显示也没有蝇群。依地而生的众生将在此中游走,其中人、非人、畜生趣之女等以手游走时,为何不犯恶作?无犯。为何?因为“诸比丘,神通者于神通境界无犯”之说。正因如此,世尊也不说其犯恶作,而说“众生亦可能获得颠倒”。“小村”即小村落。“大市”指有商铺的大镇。“以步道”即以脚步的安布。显示巴利原文
17. ‘‘Āyasmāti piyavacanameta’’nti uccanīcajanasāmaññavasena vatvā puna uccajanāveṇikavaseneva dassento ‘‘garugāravasappatissādhivacana’’nti āha. Tattha saha patissayena nissayenāti sappatisso, sanissayo, tassa garuguṇayuttesu gāravavacananti attho. Idha pana vacanameva adhivacanaṃ. Pappaṭakojanti ādikappe udakūpari paṭhamaṃ pathavībhāvena sañjātaṃ navanītapiṇḍasadisaṃ udakepi uppilanasabhāvaṃ avilīyanakaṃ atisiniddhamadhuraṃ anekayojanasahassabahalaṃ rasātalasaṅkhātaṃ pathavojaṃ. Yaṃ ādikappikehi manussehi rasataṇhāya gahetvā bhuñjamānaṃ tesaṃ kammabalena uparibhāge kakkhaḷabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā heṭṭhā purimākāreneva ṭhitaṃ, yassa ca balena ayaṃ mahāpathavī sapabbatasamuddakānanā heṭṭhāudake animujjamānā avikiriyamānā kullupari viya niccalā tiṭṭhati, taṃ pathavīsāramaṇḍanti attho, tenāha pathavīmaṇḍotiādi. Sampannanti madhurarasena upetaṃ, tenāha ‘‘sādurasa’’nti. Upapannaphaloti bahuphalo. ‘‘Nimmakkhika’’nti vatvā puna ‘‘nimmakkhikaṇḍa’’nti makkhikaṇḍānampi abhāvaṃ dasseti. Ye pathavīnissitā pāṇā, te tattha saṅkāmessāmīti ettha manussāmanussatiracchānagatitthīnampi hatthasaṅkāmane kiṃ anāmāsadoso na hotīti? Na hoti, kasmā? ‘‘Anāpatti, bhikkhave, iddhimassa iddhivisaye’’ti (pārā. 159) vacanato, teneva bhagavāpi anāmāsadosaṃ adassetvā ‘‘vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyu’’nti āha, khuddako gāmo. Mahanto sāpaṇo nigamo. Padavītihārenāti padanikkhepena.
律制立请求之论的解说显示巴利原文
Vinayapaññattiyācanakathāvaṇṇanā
18 18.“从律之制立最初起”是指从波罗夷等重法,及其他学处依布萨诵戒之次第,大部分未制立而说,并非指一切皆未制立。是故长老向世尊请求:“愿世尊为声闻制立学处,诵巴帝摩卡”,连同布萨诵戒一起请求制立学处。因为在犍度中,从阿难长老等出家起,早于罗睺罗贤者的出家,便可见到已制立的学处:“诸比丘,未得父母允许之子,不应令其出家,若令出家者,犯恶作。”就在此注释中,亦因说了“自煮……不合适”及“未作夜分或雨安居分”,可知先前已有拒授沙弥戒等。如是,虽有多项学处已被制立,但依未制立的波罗夷等而说“尔时,舍利弗,师尚不为声闻制立学处”,应如是理解。从种种所缘退转后,完全于单一所缘之心沉潜、独处,即说为“达到独一状态”,意即达到心远离。“许久”即于究竟结合之时的应用语。显示巴利原文
18.Vinayapaññattiyāmūlato pabhutīti pārājikādigarukānaṃ, tadaññesañca sikkhāpadānaṃ pātimokkhuddesakkamena yebhuyyena apaññattataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sabbena sabbaṃ apaññattatāya. Teneva thero bhagavantaṃ ‘‘sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya uddiseyya pātimokkha’’nti pātimokkhuddesena saha sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ yāci. Khandhake hi ānandattherādīnaṃ pabbajjato puretarameva rāhulabhaddassa pabbajjāya ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ananuññāto mātāpitūhi putto pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 105) paññattasikkhāpadaṃ dissati. Idheva aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sāmampi pacanaṃ…pe… na vaṭṭatī’’ti ca, ‘‘ratticchedo vassacchedo vā na kato’’ti ca vuttattā pubbeva sāmapākādipaṭikkhepo atthīti paññāyati. Evaṃ katipayasikkhāpadānaṃ paññattisabbhāvepi apaññattapārājikādike sandhāya ‘‘na tāva, sāriputta, satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetī’’ti vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Puthuttārammaṇato paṭinivattitvā sammadeva ekārammaṇe cittena līno paṭisallīno nāmāti āha ‘‘ekībhāvaṃ gatassā’’ti, cittavivekaṃ gatassāti attho. Ciranti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.
"十六种慧"即中部《不断经》教说中所说:"比丘们,舍利弗是大慧、广慧、悦慧、速慧、利慧、决断慧"此六慧,以及九次第定慧与阿罗汉道慧,如此共计十六种慧。"诸佛的声闻虽显现在净居天,然名声流布于世间",此处所举的仅是毗婆尸等佛,而非其余过去诸佛。因此应知:在《阿吒那智经》中,诸天也只取自己所知名的佛,不取其他。显示巴利原文
Soḷasavidhāya paññāyāti majjhimanikāye anupadasuttantadesanāyaṃ ‘‘mahāpañño, bhikkhave, sāriputto puthupañño hāsapañño javanapañño tikkhapañño nibbedhikapañño’’ti āgatā cha paññā ca navānupubbavihārasamāpattipaññā ca arahattamaggapaññā cāti evaṃ soḷasavidhena āgatāya paññāya. Yesaṃ buddhānaṃ sāvakā suddhāvāsesu sandissanti, teyeva loke pākaṭāti vipassīādayova idha uddhaṭā, na itare pubbabuddhā. Teneva āṭānāṭiyasutte (dī. ni. 3.275 ādayo) devāpi attano pākaṭānaṃ tesaññeva gahaṇaṃ akaṃsu, nāññesanti veditabbaṃ.
19 "懈怠"指因无事可作而无精打采,并非出于懒惰,故说"非懒惰、非懈怠"等。"无过失"指没有由身、语违犯所生起的过失。由于存在着"不杀生、不取未给与"等(《经集》402)教诫学处,故说"以七聚罪"等。考虑到每六年的最后一日,故说"一次一次",此处依此而有属格。整个赡部洲的所有比丘僧团皆举行了布萨,这是关联的。显示巴利原文
19.Kilāsunoti appossukkā payojanābhāvena nirussāhā ahesuṃ, na ālasiyena, tenāha na ālasiyakilāsunotiādi. Niddosatāyāti kāyavacīvītikkamasamuṭṭhāpakadosābhāvā. Pāṇaṃ na hane na cādinnamādiyetiādinā (su. ni. 402) ovādasikkhāpadānaṃ vijjamānattā vuttaṃ sattāpattikkhandhavasenātiādi. Channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ osānadivasaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘sakiṃ saki’’nti vuttattā tadapekkhamettha sāmivacanaṃ. Sakalajambudīpe sabbopi bhikkhusaṅgho uposathaṃ akāsīti sambandho.
于"忍辱是最上苦行"等句中,称为安忍的忍辱,能烧尽因众生诸行所生的不忍不耐之烦恼,故名为最上苦行。由于出离了称为"林"的渴爱,涅槃是一切法中最为殊胜的,诸佛如此说。若缺乏上述的忍辱,而行杀生或砍打等,即为害他者;以偷盗、邪淫等,及妄语、离间语、粗恶语等而恼害他人者,由于未除遣恶法,故非出家者;由于未寂静恶法,故非沙门——这是其义。以戒律仪断除一切恶,以世间定与观修习善法、令之成就,以一切道果清净自心、令心光明,此即诸佛的教诫。不诽谤,即不以语诽谤任何人。不害,即不以身加害任何人,并于其余的巴帝摩卡戒中防护自身。于食知量,即与活命遍净、资具依止戒相结合;以此为首,防护根门;以此为首,阐明住于阿兰若的边地坐卧处;以此为首,安立于称为四资具知足、乐修习的大圣种中;于称为增上心的世间与出世间定,以令其生起的方式精进专修,此即诸佛的教诫。这是连接。显示巴利原文
Khantīparamantiādīsu titikkhāsaṅkhātā khanti sattasaṅkhārehi nibbattāniṭṭhākhamanakilesatapanato paramaṃ tapo nāma. Vānasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya nikkhantattā nibbānaṃ sabbadhammehi paramaṃ uttamanti buddhā vadanti. Yathāvuttakhantiyā abhāvena pāṇavadhaṃ vā chedanatāḷanādiṃ vā karonto parūpaghātī parassaharaṇaparadārātikkamanādīhi musāpesuññapharusādīhi ca paraṃ viheṭhayanto ca bāhitapāpatāya abhāvena pabbajito vā samitapāpatāya abhāvena samaṇo vā na hotīti attho. Sīlasaṃvarena sabbapāpassa anuppādanaṃ lokiyasamādhivipassanāhi kusalassa upasampādanaṃ nipphādanaṃ sabbehi maggaphalehi attano cittassa parisodhanaṃ pabhassarabhāvakaraṇaṃ yaṃ, tametaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ anusiṭṭhi. Anupavādoti vācāya kassaci anupavadanaṃ. Anupaghātoti kāyena kassaci upaghātākaraṇaṃ vuttāvasese ca pātimokkhasaṅkhāte sīle attānaṃ saṃvaraṇaṃ. Bhattasmiṃ mattaññutāsaṅkhātaājīvapārisuddhipaccayasannissitasīlasamāyogo tammukhena indriyasaṃvaro pantasenāsanasaṅkhātaṃ araññavāsaṃ tammukhena pakāsite catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmatāsaṅkhātamahāariyavaṃse patiṭṭhānañca adhicittasaṅkhāte lokiyalokuttarasamādhimhi taduppādanavasena āyogo anuyogo ca yaṃ, tametaṃ buddhānaṃ anusiṭṭhīti yojanā.
“直至教法终尽”,这是因教诫巴帝摩卡已不存在而说。然而,般涅槃之后,连教诫巴帝摩卡的诵出也不复存在,因为只有诸佛才会诵出它,声闻弟子不会诵出。“初成正觉时”指从成道算起的二十年间;但阿阇梨法护长老说:“在四十五年中的最初十五年,为初成正觉时。”然而,从制定学处开始,便只诵出教诫巴帝摩卡,这是就巴帝摩卡诵出次第的圆满而说,意指制定学处之时。“无因无缘”是依次以遮止因缘的方式遮止原因。“以此因”即以此原因。“于不清净的众中”指因混有无惭无愧之人而不清净的众中,不仅诸佛在不清净的众中诵出巴帝摩卡不合适,声闻弟子亦然。然而,通过举罪、忆念等方式净化后再令共住,则是声闻弟子的责任;诸佛则制定学处、教导布萨等仪轨后便放下,不执行举罪、忆念等事。正因如此,世尊在不清净的众中未诵巴帝摩卡,整夜默然安坐。比丘们了知世尊的心意后,将不清净之人逐出。因此,应知声闻弟子若明知众不清净而行布萨等僧羯磨,若非为除遣梵行的障难,也不适宜。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāva sāsanapariyantā’’ti āṇāpātimokkhassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Parinibbānato pana uddhaṃ ovādapātimokkhuddesopi nattheva, buddhā eva hi taṃ uddisanti, na sāvakā. Paṭhamabodhiyanti bodhito vīsativassaparicchinne kāle, ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘pañcacattālīsāya vassesu ādito pannarasa vassāni paṭhamabodhī’’ti vuttaṃ, sikkhāpadapaññattikaālato pana pabhuti āṇāpātimokkhameva uddisantīti idaṃ pātimokkhuddesakkameneva paripuṇṇaṃ katvā sikkhāpadapaññattikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhānaṃ anavakāsoti yathākkamaṃ hetupaccayapaṭikkhepavasena kāraṇapaṭikkhepo. Yanti yena kāraṇena. Aparisuddhāya parisāyāti alajjīpuggalehi vomissatāya asuddhāya parisāya, na kevalaṃ buddhānaññeva aparisuddhāya parisāya pātimokkhuddeso ayutto, atha kho sāvakānampi. Codanāsāraṇādivasena pana sodhetvā saṃvāsakaraṇaṃ sāvakānaññeva bhāro, buddhā pana sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā uposathādikaraṇavidhānaṃ sikkhāpetvā vissajjenti, codanāsāraṇādīni na karonti, teneva bhagavā asuddhāya parisāya pātimokkhaṃ anuddisitvā sakalarattiṃ tuṇhībhūto nisīdi. Bhikkhū ca bhagavato adhippāyaṃ ñatvā asuddhapuggalaṃ bahi nīhariṃsu. Tasmā sāvakānampi asuddhāya parisāya ñatvā uposathādisaṅghakammakaraṇaṃ brahmacariyantarāyakaraṇaṃ vinā na vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
“亲对声闻”指于诸佛面前、在世时出家的最后声闻弟子。为了显明殊胜与超越之义,再次取用“殊胜”一词,说:“或以殊胜、极殊胜的财富家族等。”应知“等”字包括了殊胜、中等、不殊胜等。那些末代的声闻弟子令其隐没,这是关联。显示巴利原文
Sammukhasāvakānanti buddhānaṃ sammukhe dharamānakāle pabbajitānaṃ sabbantimānaṃ sāvakānaṃ. Uḷārātisayajotanatthaṃ ‘‘uḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vā’’ti puna uḷārasaddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Ādi-saddena uḷāramajjhattaanuḷārādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Te pacchimā sāvakā antaradhāpesunti sambandho.
即使学处尚未制定,若声闻弟子是同一种姓等,便不会像毁坏自己家族代代相传的经典那样,毁坏世尊的教法。然而,因为学处尚未制定,而这些比丘并非同一种姓等,所以他们令教法毁灭。为了显示此义,故说“由于同名……因此互相恼害”等。在《久住品》中,则应知即使声闻弟子有不同种姓等的差别,由于学处制定的圆满,教法得以长久流传。若如此,为何一切诸佛不都制定学处?因为教法的长久流传,并非仅以学处制定为唯一的因,还要有未来通过受持法与律而能为声闻弟子所调伏的众生出现,这才是原因。因此,当有应调伏的众生出现时,诸佛便制定学处;若无,则不制定。故应知,圆满的制定本身也暗示了应调伏众生的出现,因此被说为教法长久流传的原因。圣典中有“千比丘僧……教诫”一句,此处的“千”是限定千数的僧团,如同“千世界”等(《长部》2.18)的用法。其关联为“那千比丘僧”。因“千”字是单数,故说“千比丘的”,而依支分关系,应以复数说明“被教诫的”,应如此看待。显示巴利原文
Apaññattepi sikkhāpade yadi sāvakā samānajātiādikā siyuṃ, attano kulānugataganthaṃ viya bhagavato vacanaṃ na nāseyyuṃ. Yasmā pana sikkhāpadañca na paññattaṃ, ime ca bhikkhū na samānajātiādikā, tasmā vināsesunti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ yasmā ekanāmā…pe… tasmā aññamaññaṃ viheṭhentātiādi vuttaṃ. Ciraṭṭhitikavāre pana sāvakānaṃ nānājaccādibhāve samānepi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā paripuṇṇatāya sāsanassa cirappavatti veditabbā. Yadi evaṃ kasmā sabbepi buddhā sikkhāpadāni na paññapentīti? Yasmā ca sāsanassa cirappavattiyā na kevalaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva hetu, atha kho āyatiṃ dhammavinayaṃ gahetvā sāvakehi vinetabbapuggalānaṃ sambhavopi, tasmā tesaṃ sambhave sati buddhā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapenti, nāsatīti paripuṇṇāpaññattiyeva veneyyasambhavassāpi sūcanato sāsanassa cirappavattiyā hetu vuttāti veditabbā. Pāḷiyaṃ sahassaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ…pe… ovadatīti ettha sahassasaṅkhyāparicchinno saṅgho sahasso sahassilokadhātūtiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.18) viya. Taṃ sahassaṃ bhikkhusaṅghanti yojanā. Sahassasaddassa ekavacanantatāya ‘‘bhikkhusahassassā’’ti vatvā avayavāpekkhāya ‘‘ovadiyamānāna’’nti bahuvacananiddeso katoti daṭṭhabbo.
“诸心无取而解脱诸漏”一句中,“诸漏”是表示行为主体的具格;“诸心”是表示主体的复数;“解脱”是表示行为对象的词。因此,由作为主体的诸漏,不以所缘而执取,令诸心得解脱——此处应如此理解其义,故说“他们之心”等。“由哪些漏”句中,“诸漏”也是具格,表行为主体;“解脱”是表行为对象的词。“他们”指诸漏;“他们”指诸心,是受事的复数。“解脱”是表行为主体的词,意为“令解脱”。“无取而解脱”意为:不以所缘执取诸心,诸漏便从诸心中成为已解脱者。或者,“诸漏”是表分离的从格,“解脱”是表行为主体之词。因此,应如此理解:不依渴爱等执取任何有为法,诸心便成已解脱者。“依前文”指对已述“于某可怖丛林”之文的顾念,即“于彼前文”如此顾念之义,故说“已说”等。“怖畏所作”指怖畏之因的造作、行为,即怖畏所作;为显明“于彼怖畏所作中”之义,而说“于怖畏行为中”。“令怖畏者”即怖畏者,也就是可怖者;其状态本应说为“可怖性”,这里省略“性”字,是以另一种方式显示其义,故说“或者”等。“多数众生”是显示……”},{显示巴利原文
Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti ettha āsavehīti kattuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Cittānīti paccattabahuvacanaṃ. Vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ. Tasmā āsavehi kattubhūtehi anupādāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena aggahetvā cittāni vimocitānīti evamettha attho gahetabboti āha tesañhi cittānītiādi. Yehi āsavehīti etthāpi kattuatthe eva karaṇavacanaṃ. Vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ. Teti āsavā. Tānīti cittāni, upayogabahuvacanañcetaṃ. Vimucciṃsūti kattusādhanaṃ, vimocesunti attho. Aggahetvā vimucciṃsūti ārammaṇavasena tāni cittāni aggahetvā āsavā tehi cittehi muttavanto ahesunti attho. Atha vā āsavehīti nissakkavacanaṃ, vimucciṃsūti kattusādhanaṃ. Tasmā kañci saṅkhatadhammaṃ taṇhādivasena anupādiyitvā cittāni vimuttavantāni ahesunti attho gahetabbo. Purimavacanāpekkhanti aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍeti vuttavacanassa apekkhanaṃ tasmiṃ purimavacaneti evaṃ apekkhananti attho, tenāha yaṃ vuttantiādi. Bhiṃsanassa bhayassa kataṃ karaṇaṃ kiriyā bhiṃsanakataṃ, tasmiṃ bhiṃsanakiriyāyāti atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakiriyāyā’’ti. Bhiṃsayatīti bhiṃsano, sova bhiṃsanako, tassa bhāvo ‘‘bhiṃsanakatta’’nti vattabbe ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā vuttanti pakārantarena atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Bahutarānaṃ sattānaṃ vāti yebhuyyenāti padassa atthadassanaṃ. Tena ca yo kocīti padassāpi yo yo pavisatīti vicchāvasena nānatthena attho gahetabboti dasseti, yo yo pavisati, tesu bahutarānanti atthasambhavato.
“结语”指于所作之义中,对已说之义的总结。此处结语的次第如下:舍利弗,对于毗婆尸等三位佛陀,由于自般涅槃后,依教法应调伏的众生已不存在,故为他们详细制定学处时,有厌倦、少事;而对于具足亲依止缘的应调伏者,以心观心后,乃至进入可怖丛林而教诫,为令他们生起道果而说法时,即无厌倦、有精进,而非详细说法教诫。舍利弗,此即是因,此即是缘,由此毗婆尸等三位佛陀的梵行不得久住。“依人双”指人之双的运行时间,依其力,即依人之力。“最后一切”指于般涅槃日出家者,如须跋陀罗之类。“十万又六十千岁”这是从世尊出生时算起所说,若从成道时算起,则应知为不足。“唯二”指世尊在世时为一,般涅槃后为一,共唯二个人双。显示巴利原文
Nigamananti pakate atthe yathāvuttassa atthassa upasaṃhāro. Ayañhettha nigamanakkamo – yā hi, sāriputta, vipassīādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ attano parinibbānato upari pariyattivasena vinetabbānaṃ puggalānaṃ abhāvena tesaṃ atthāya vitthārato sikkhāpadapaññattiyaṃ kilāsutā appossukkatā, yā ca upanissayasampannānaṃ veneyyānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca bhiṃsanakavanasaṇḍepi gantvā ovadantānaṃ tesaṃ maggaphaluppādanatthāya dhammadesanāya eva akilāsutā saussāhatā, na vitthārato dhammavinayadesanāya, ayaṃ kho, sāriputta, hetu, ayaṃ paccayo, yena vipassīādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosīti. Purisayugavasenāti purisānaṃ yugaṃ pavattikālo, tassa vasena, purisavasenāti attho. Sabbapacchimakoti parinibbānadivase pabbajito subhaddasadiso. Satasahassaṃ saṭṭhimattāni ca vassasahassānīti idaṃ bhagavato jātito paṭṭhāya vuttaṃ, bodhito paṭṭhāya pana gaṇiyamānaṃ ūnaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dveyevāti dharamāne bhagavati ekaṃ, parinibbute ekanti dve eva purisayugāni.
20-1 “不能”指不能达到。“何关联”指与前面所说有何联系。“已说”指已请求之义。“于他们”指对于违犯之法。“他们”指现世等诸漏。“他们”指违犯之法。“亲族”即因祖父、父、子等而流转,故为亲族圈。“属于世间利养”即是属于世间,因被烦恼所触,故为属于世间利养。“唯以出家略说”指以授予十学处等出家入门。“此”指不行淫等。“力”指制定学处的堪能。“自肤”指自身的清净肤色、本色,或美好肤色。“余”指显示其余词句的连结。今为显示义理上的连结,而说“此即此处”等。其中,“或”字表决定;“实”字表成就,即“此即是此处”之义。然后显示“时师”一词之义,说“时彼师”。“令生长”指于破裂处,令凹陷之肉平等生长。“于己师位”指在自己为师的地位,或于师之事业上。显示巴利原文
20-1.Asambhuṇantenāti apāpuṇantena. Ko anusandhīti purimakathāya imassa ko sambandhoti attho. Yaṃ vuttanti yaṃ yācitanti attho. Yesūti vītikkamadhammesu. Nesanti diṭṭhadhammikādiāsavānaṃ. Teti vītikkamadhammā. Ñātiyeva pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivaṭṭanato parivaṭṭoti ñātiparivaṭṭo. Lokāmisabhūtanti lokapariyāpannaṃ hutvā kilesehi āmasitabbato lokāmisabhūtaṃ. Pabbajjāsaṅkhepenevāti dasasikkhāpadadānādipabbajjāmukhena. Etanti methunādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ. Thāmanti sikkhāpadapaññāpanasāmatthiyaṃ. Sañchavinti sukkacchaviṃ pakaticchaviṃ, sundaracchaviṃ vā. Sesanti sesapadayojanadassanaṃ. Idāni atthayojanaṃ dassento āha ayaṃ vā hetthātiādi. Tattha vā-saddo avadhāraṇe. Hi-saddo pasiddhiyaṃ, ayameva hetthāti attho. Atha satthāti padassa atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘tadā satthā’’ti. Ropetvāti phālitaṭṭhāne ninnaṃ maṃsaṃ samaṃ vaḍḍhetvā. Sake ācariyaketi attano ācariyabhāve, ācariyakamme vā.
“以广大性”指以众多性。“不如理沉入者”指以非方便而执著者,即颠倒认知之义。“以味混味”指以无过失之性混入有过失之性。“非法非律”指高涨之法与高涨之律,即令法与律趋于灭没而作之义。“于此义”指于此僧团之事。“光耀者”指具照耀之性者。“如是名如是姓”指此尊者具足须陀洹之名与姓,与“此称为须陀洹”的通常说法相连。“不堕处法”中,“法”字表自性,其义即能投掷于恶趣之见等不善法,故说“他们法”等。今为唯以自性显示其义,而说“堕落”等。“决定者”指于七生之内决定入无余涅槃者。其因由称为“以正觉为归趣”。显示巴利原文
Vipulabhāvenāti bahubhāvena. Ayoniso ummujjamānāti anupāyena abhinivisamānā, viparītato jānamānāti attho. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjasabhāvena sāvajjasabhāvaṃ sammissetvā. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayanti uggatadhammaṃ uggatavinayañca, yathā dhammo ca vinayo ca vinassissati, evaṃ katvāti attho. Imasmiṃ attheti imasmiṃ saṅghādhikāre. Pabhassaroti pabhāsanasīlo. Evaṃnāmo evaṃgottoti soyamāyasmā sotāpannotināmagottena samannāgato, ayaṃ vuccati sotāpannoti pakatena sambandho. Avinipātadhammoti ettha dhamma-saddo sabhāvavācī, so ca atthato apāyesu khipanako diṭṭhiādiakusaladhammo evāti āha ‘‘ye dhammā’’tiādi. Idāni sabhāvavaseneva atthaṃ dassetuṃ vinipatanaṃ vātiādi vuttaṃ. Niyatoti sattabhavabbhantare niyatakkhandhaparinibbāno. Tassa kāraṇamāha ‘‘sambodhiparāyaṇo’’ti.
22 “随法性”指随顺出世间法的自性。“给予自恣摄受”指以“于来月满月日将举行自恣”的许可而给予,即推迟自恣之义;以此显示,以某种因缘推迟自恣是可行的。“于末伽始月第一日”是依太阴月所说,即后迦提月满月的次日,于月出之日之义。“于颇沙月第一日”此处亦同此理。此仅为举例,因应调伏者未成熟,于颇沙月之后,亦可一、二乃至四月住于彼处,以余月结束游行。“于一万世界”这是就天与梵天所说。然人类唯于此世界内可得觉悟。于其他世界,为令人类于此世界生起欲求,诸佛亦观照无量世界,而作相应的教诫神变。显示巴利原文
22.Anudhammatāti lokuttaradhammānugato sabhāvo. Pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvāti ‘‘āgāminiyā puṇṇamiyā pavāressāmā’’ti anumatidānavasena datvā, pavāraṇaṃ ukkaḍḍhitvāti attho, etena nayena kenaci paccayena pavāraṇukkaḍḍhanaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Māgasirassa paṭhamadivaseti candamāsavasena vuttaṃ, aparakattikapuṇṇamāya anantare pāṭipadadivaseti attho. Phussamāsassa paṭhamadivaseti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idañca nidassanamattaṃ veneyyānaṃ aparipākaṃ paṭicca phussamāsato parañca ekadviticatumāsampi tattheva vasitvā sesamāsehi cārikāya pariyosāpanato. Dasasahassacakkavāḷeti idaṃ devabrahmānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Manussā pana imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe bodhaneyyā honti. Itaracakkavāḷesu pana manussānaṃ imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe uppattiyā chanduppādanatthaṃ anantampi cakkavāḷaṃ oloketvā tadanuguṇānusāsanī pāṭihāriyaṃ karontiyeva.
“来”中,“来”字即“来”义,故说“来,我们走”,即“来,我们去”之义。“如金液所染”指如融化之金液般呈金色,即金色之义。于圣典中“我们被邀请”等处,应连接为“我们被邀请,已住雨安居”及“我们被邀请,已住雨安居而存在”。显示巴利原文
Āyāmāti ettha ā-saddo āgacchāti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘āgaccha yāmā’’ti, ehi gacchāmāti attho. Suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāhīti vilīnasuvaṇṇajalaṃ viya piñjarāhi suvaṇṇavaṇṇāhīti attho. Pāḷiyaṃ nimantitamhātiādīsu ‘‘nimantitā vassaṃvutthā amhā’’ti ca, ‘‘nimantitā vassaṃvutthā atthā’’ti ca sambandho.
Yanti:指应施之物的生起,即“任何”之义。No natthi:指“我们没有”,或是对“noti”的解释为“没有”。Ettha:指在居家生活中。Taṃ:指那个原因或应作之事。Kuto:指从何因由。Yena:指以那个原因或应作之事。在第二种义释中,ettha的解释是“在此三个月的期间内”。Taṃ:指那个应施之物。显示巴利原文
Yanti deyyadhammajātaṃ, yaṃ kiñcīti attho. No natthīti amhākaṃ natthi, noti vā etassa vivaraṇaṃ natthīti. Etthāti gharāvāse. Tanti taṃ kāraṇaṃ, kiccaṃ vā. Kutoti katarahetuto. Yanti yena kāraṇena, kiccena vā. Dutiye atthavikappe etthāti imassa vivaraṇaṃ imasmiṃ temāsabbhantareti. Tanti taṃ deyyadhammaṃ.
Tatthacā:意为于善巧。通过使其达到锐利、清净的状态而激励后。Vassetvā:意为使未来成为习气分的法雨降下后。Yaṃ divasaṃ:意为于某一天。显示巴利原文
Tatthacāti kusale. Tikkhavisadabhāvāpādanena samuttejetvā. Vassetvāti āyatiṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ dhammaratanavassaṃ otāretvā. Yaṃ divasanti yasmiṃ divase.
23 Pattuṇṇapattapaṭe cā:指绢布和中国布。Tumbāni:指皮制的油容器。Anubandhitvā:意为作了不随行。Abhiranta一词在此是“喜好”的同义词,故说“随其所欲”等。Soreyya等是作为大游行路途的Soreyya城等。Payāgapatiṭṭhāna既是恒河一处特殊渡口的名称,也是其附近村庄的名称。Samantapāsādikāya:意为从各方面、以一切方式生起净信,故称为“Samantapāsādikā”,即是此义。显示巴利原文
23.Pattuṇṇapattapaṭe cāti pattuṇṇapaṭe cīnapaṭe ca. Tumbānīti cammamayatelabhājanāni. Anubandhitvāti anupagamanaṃ katvā. Abhiranta-saddo idha abhirucipariyāyoti āha ‘‘yathājjhāsaya’’ntiādi. Soreyyādīni mahāmaṇḍalacārikāya maggabhūtāni soreyyanagarādīni. Payāgapatiṭṭhānanti gaṅgāya ekassa titthavisesassāpi, taṃsamīpe gāmassāpi nāmaṃ. Samantapāsādikāyāti samantato sabbaso pasādaṃ janetīti samantapāsādikā, tassā.
然而,为详细说明何谓“从各方面”(samantato),故说“此中”(tatridam)等语。其中,关于已述的注释《善见律》,于彼《善见律》之中,就其“普皆善净”之性质,即有此将说之偈颂,应作如此联结。应知是依外因缘、内因缘、学处因缘而显示因缘之分。亦有人言“是为上座部教说之显示、事由分类之显示”,亦可说“是为学处当前事由分类之显示”。而所谓“学处因缘”,应知是指毗舍离等作为制戒之特殊地点。“此处”(Ettha)指在《善见律》中。“Sampassataṃ viññūnaṃ”乃是关联之词,故应联结为“此《善见律》于诸智者可共见之中,正是如此流传”。显示巴利原文
Ye pana pakāre sandhāya ‘‘samantato’’ti vuccati, te pakāre vitthāretvā dassetuṃ tatridantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘samantapāsādikā’’ti yā saṃvaṇṇanā vuttā, tatra tassaṃ samantapāsādikāyaṃ samantapasādikabhāve idaṃ vakkhamānagāthāvacanaṃ hotīti yojanā. Bāhiranidānaabbhantaranidānasikkhāpadanidānānaṃ vasena nidānappabhedadīpanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Theravādappakāsanaṃ vatthuppabhedadīpana’’ntipi vadanti. ‘‘Sikkhāpadānaṃ paccuppannavatthuppabhedadīpana’’ntipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Sikkhāpadanidānanti pana vesālīādi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā kāraṇabhūtadesaviseso veditabbo. Etthāti samantapāsādikāya. Sampassataṃ viññūnanti sambandho, tasmā ayaṃ samantapāsādikātveva pavattāti yojetabbā.
如是,在律藏注释《Samantapāsādikā》的《Vimativinodanī》中。显示巴利原文
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya vimativinodaniyaṃ